Integra DTR-7.8 Receiver Instruction manual

DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 1 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
AV Receiver
DTR-7.8
Instruction Manual
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 2 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Thank you for purchasing an Integra AV Receiver. Please read this manual thoroughly before making
connections and plugging in the unit. Following the instructions in this manual will enable you to
obtain optimum performance and listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.
Please retain this manual for future reference.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING
TO
QUALIFIED
SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
WARNING
AVIS
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE
NE PAS OUVRIR
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
Important Safety Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
2
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not
fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand, PORTABLE CART WARNING
tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or
sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
S3125A
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
15. Damage Requiring Service
Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer
servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen
into the apparatus,
C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
water,
D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by
following the operating instructions. Adjust only
those controls that are covered by the operating
instructions as an improper adjustment of other
controls may result in damage and will often
require extensive work by a qualified technician
to restore the apparatus to its normal operation,
E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in
any way, and
F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in
performance this indicates a need for service.
16. Object and Liquid Entry
Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus
through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a
fire or electric shock.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases shall be placed on the apparatus.
Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top of
this unit.
17. Batteries
Always consider the environmental issues and follow local regulations when disposing of batteries.
18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,
such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is adequate ventilation.
Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and sides
and 10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf
or board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4")
away from the rear panel or wall, creating a flue-like
gap for warm air to escape.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 3 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Precautions
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal without the permission of the copyright holder.
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not userserviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact
the dealer from whom you purchased this unit..
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild detergent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because
they may damage the finish or remove the panel lettering.
4. Power
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.
For North American model
Pressing the [Standby/On] button to select Standby
mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If you do not
intend to use the unit for an extended period,
remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
5. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets
inside this unit, have it checked by the dealer from
whom you purchased this unit.
6. Handling Notes
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you originally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks on
the case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm
after prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so
be sure to use it occasionally.
For U.S. models
FCC Information for User
CAUTION:
The user changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For Canadian Models
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
Modèle canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
NMB-003 DU CANADA.
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.
3
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 4 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Precautions—Continued
For British models
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power
supply cord of this unit should be performed only by
qualified service personnel.
IMPORTANT
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance
with the following code:
Blue:
Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as
follows:
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured red.
IMPORTANT
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse
needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the same
ampere rating as that indicated on the plug. Check for
the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable
fuse in the plug.
For European Models
Declaration of Conformity
We, ONKYO EUROPE
ELECTRONICS GmbH
LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,
82194 GROEBENZELL,
GERMANY
declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product
described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the
corresponding
technical standards such as EN60065,
EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.
GROEBENZELL, GERMANY
K. MIYAGI
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
4
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 5 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Contents
Features ............................................................ 6
Supplied Accessories ...................................... 7
Multiroom Capability ........................................ 8
Getting to Know the AV Receiver ................... 9
Front Panel ...................................................................9
Display .......................................................................11
Rear Panel ..................................................................12
Remote Controller .......................................... 14
Installing the Batteries ...............................................14
Using the Remote Controller .....................................14
About the Remote Controller Modes .........................15
Receiver/Tape Mode ..................................................15
DVD Mode .................................................................17
CD/MD/CDR Modes .................................................18
Dock Mode .................................................................19
Connecting Your Speakers ........................... 20
Enjoying Home Theater .............................................20
Connecting Your Speakers ........................................21
Bi-amping the Front Speakers ...................................23
Connecting Antennas .................................... 24
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna ..........................24
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna ............................24
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna .........................25
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna ........................25
Connecting Your Components ..................... 26
About AV Connections ..............................................26
Connecting Audio and Video Signals
to the AV Receiver ..................................................27
Which Connections Should I Use? ............................27
Connecting a TV or Projector ....................................29
Connecting a DVD player ..........................................30
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback ..................32
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording ................33
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial
Set-top box or Other Video Source .........................34
Connecting Components with HDMI ........................35
Connecting a Game Console ......................................37
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component ...38
Connecting a CD Player .............................................39
Connecting a Turntable ..............................................39
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT
Recorder ..................................................................40
Connecting a Power Amplifier ..................................40
Connecting an RI Dock ..............................................41
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components
(North American model only) .................................41
Connecting Integra/Onkyo
Components ............42
Connecting the Power Cord .......................................42
Playing Your AV Components .......................60
Basic AV Receiver Operation ................................... 60
Listening to the Radio ....................................61
Listening to AM/FM Stations .................................... 61
Using RDS (not North American model) .................. 63
Listening to XM Satellite Radio®
(North American Model Only) ............................... 65
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio®
(North American Models Only) .............................. 70
Presetting AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS Stations ........78
Common Functions ........................................79
Setting the Display Brightness ................................... 79
Adjusting Speaker Levels .......................................... 79
Muting the AV Receiver ............................................ 79
Using the Sleep Timer ............................................... 80
Using Headphones ..................................................... 80
Displaying Source Information .................................. 80
Selecting Audio Inputs .............................................. 81
Specifying the Digital Signal Format ........................ 81
Using the Listening Modes ............................82
Selecting the Listening Modes ................................... 82
Listening Modes Available for
Each Source Format ................................................ 83
About the Listening Modes ....................................... 87
Recording ........................................................89
Recording the Input Source ....................................... 89
Recording from Different AV Sources ...................... 89
Onscreen Setup Menus ..................................90
Menu Map .................................................................. 90
Adjusting the Listening Modes .....................91
Using the Re-EQ Function ......................................... 91
Using the Late Night Function .................................. 91
Audio Adjust .............................................................. 92
Listening Mode Presets .............................................. 94
Advanced Setup ..............................................96
Speaker Setup ............................................................ 96
Source Setup ............................................................ 103
Miscellaneous Setup ................................................ 106
Hardware Setup ....................................................... 108
Lock Setup ............................................................... 110
Zone 2 and Zone 3 ........................................111
Turning On the AV Receiver .......................... 43
Connecting Zone 2 ................................................... 111
Connecting Zone 3 ................................................... 112
Powered Zone 2 Setting ........................................... 113
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings ..................................... 114
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3 ......................................... 114
Using the 12V Triggers ........................................... 117
Using the Remote Controller in Zone 2/3
and Multiroom Control Kits .................................. 118
Turning On and Standby ............................................43
Controlling Other Components ...................119
First Time Setup ............................................. 44
Entering Remote Control Codes .............................. 119
Resetting the Remote Controller ............................. 120
Learning Commands ................................................ 122
Using Macros ........................................................... 123
Speaker Settings .........................................................44
HDMI Monitor Setup .................................................45
HDMI Input Setup .....................................................46
Component Video Input Setup ...................................48
Changing the Input Display .......................................49
Digital Input Setup .....................................................50
Analog Input Setup ....................................................52
Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT) ...53
TV Format Setup (not North American models) .......58
AM Frequency Step Setup(on some models) ............59
Troubleshooting ...........................................124
Specifications ...............................................127
5
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 6 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Features
Amplifier
Tuner
• 7-channel amplifier
• 130 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8
ohm loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz,
with a maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.08%
(FTC)
• Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry
• Powered Zone 2 capability
• Bi-amp capability for front speakers
• WRAT (Wide Range Amplifier Technology)
• Massive High Current Power Supply (H.C.P.S.) transformer
• Color-coded speaker terminal posts
• XM*8 Satellite Radio ready (N. America only)
Processing
• THX*1 Surround EX
• THX Ultra2*1 certified
• Dolby*2 Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Pro Logic IIx
• DTS*3, DTS-ES Discrete, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-HD
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS 96/24,
DTS Neo:6
• Neural Surround*4, THX-Neural
• Theater-Dimensional*5 virtual surround sound
• DSD Direct
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A converters
• Powerful and highly accurate 32-bit DSP processing
• Re-EQ*6 function
• Tone control on all channels (7.1)
• 15-band EQ on 7 channels, 5-band EQ on subwoofer
* XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required; sold separately.
• SIRIUS*9 Satellite Radio ready (N. America only)
* SiriusConnect Home tuner kit required; sold separately.
•
•
•
•
•
40 AM/FM/SIRIUS/XM presets (N. American model)
40 AM/FM presets (other models)
AM/FM auto tuning
RDS radio data (Australia only)
Direct tuning
Others
•
•
•
•
•
Audyssey MultEQ XT room correction*10
Easy-to-use onscreen setup menus
IR IN A/B and OUT
12V TRIGGER OUT A, B, C
Preprogrammed remote controller for use with other
AV components, with Learning and Macro functions
*1
THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround EX
is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.
*2
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
*3
Audio/Video
• Zone 2 with level, tone, balance, and left, right, and
subwoofer pre outs, and composite video output, and
component video output (assignable).
• Zone 3 with level, balance, and left, right, and subwoofer pre outs
• 3 HDMI*7 inputs, 1 output (Version 1.3a)
• HDMI upconversion of composite video, S-Video,
and component video sources
• Component video upconversion of composite video
and S-Video sources
• Composite video to S-Video and S-Video to composite video conversion
• 6 digital inputs (3 optical, 3 coaxial), 1 output (optical)
• 3 component video inputs, 2 outputs
• 6 S-Video inputs, 2 outputs
• RS-232 control
• Color-coded, assignable 7.1 multichannel input
• 7.1-channel pre out
6
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc., and “DTS-HD
Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
*4
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
*5
Theater-Dimensional is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
*6 Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX
Ltd.
*7
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
*8
XM Ready® is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005
XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 7 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Features—Continued
Supplied Accessories
Make sure you have the following accessories:
*9
©2005 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS,” SiriusConnect,
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. Available only in the contiguous
United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
*10
Remote controller and three batteries (AA/R6)
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories. U.S.
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.
Surround Back
Right
Surround Back
Right
Zone 2
Right
Zone 2
Right
Center
Surround Back
Right
Surround Back
Right
Zone 2
Right
Zone 2
Right
Center
Surround
Right
Surround
Right
Surround Back
Left
Surround Back
Left
Zone 2
Left
Zone 2
Left
Surround Back
Left
Surround Back
Left
Zone 2
Left
Zone 2
Left
Center
Surround
Left
Surround
Left
1
Center
Power cord
(Power cord varies from country to country.)
Surround
Right
Surround
Right
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Front
Right
Front
Right
SP-B / Zone 2
Right
SP-B / Zone 2
Right
Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Surround
Left
Surround
Left
“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.
*
AM loop antenna
Front
Left
Front
Left
SP-B / Zone 2
Left
SP-B / Zone 2
Left
“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.
*
Indoor FM antenna
Front
Right
Front
Right
SP-B / Zone 2
Right
SP-B / Zone 2
Right
*
Speaker setup microphone
Front
Left
Front
Left
SP-B / Zone 2
Left
SP-B / Zone 2
Left
THX Ultra2
Before any home theater component can be THX
Ultra2 certified, it must pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase
will give you superb performance for many years to
come. THX Ultra2 requirements define hundreds of
parameters, including power amplifier performance,
and pre-amplifier performance and operation for
both digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2 receivers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g.,
THX Mode) which accurately translate movie
soundtracks for home theater playback.
2
3
Speaker Cable
Speaker cable labels
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product
name indicates the color. Specifications and operation are the same
regardless of color.
7
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 8 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Multiroom Capability
You can use three speaker systems with this AV receiver—a surround-sound speaker system (up to 7.1 channels) in
your main listening room, a stereo speaker system in a second room, or Zone 2, as we call it, and another stereo
speaker system in a third room that we call Zone 3 (external power amplifier required). And, you can select a different
audio source for each room.
Main Room: In your main listening room, you can enjoy up to 7.1-channel playback (see pages 21–22).
You can enjoy the various listening modes such as Dolby, DTS, and THX (pages 82–88).
*While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback is reduced to 5.1-channels (see page 111).
Zone 2: In your Zone 2 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback (see page 111).
Zone 3: In your Zone 3 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback (see page 112).
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.
Main Room
Surround back left and right
speakers
Front left and right speakers
*While Powered Zone 2 is being
used, nothing is output by these
speakers (page 113).
Subwoofer
Center speaker
Surround left and right speakers
Zone 2 Room
Left and right
stereo speakers
8
Zone 3 Room
Left and right
stereo speakers
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 9 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Getting to Know the AV Receiver
Front Panel
North American model
1 2
Q R
45 6
S
T
7
8 9J K L MN O
U
V W
P
X
Other models
3
J
The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
A Standby/On button (43)
Sets the AV receiver to On or Standby.
B Standby indicator (43)
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and
flashes while a signal is being received from the
remote controller.
C Ready indicator (109)
North American model doesn’t have this indicator.
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and
HDMI Power Control is enabled.
D Zone 2 indicator (115)
Flashes when Zone 2 is being set. Lights up when
Zone 2 is on.
9
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 10 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
E Zone 3 indicator (115)
Flashes when Zone 3 is being set. Lights up when
Zone 3 is on.
F Remote-control sensor (14)
Receives control signals from the remote controller.
G Stereo button (82)
Selects the Stereo listening mode.
H Listening Mode [ ]/[ ] buttons (82)
Select the listening modes.
I Display
See “Display” on page 11.
J Dimmer (RT/PTY/TP) button (64, 79)
Adjusts the display brightness.
On models other than the North American model,
this is the RT/PTY/TP button, and it’s used with
RDS (Radio Data System). See “Using RDS (not
North American model)” on page 63.
K Memory button (78)
Used when storing or deleting radio presets.
L Tuning Mode button (61)
Selects the Auto or Manual tuning mode for AM
and FM radio.
M Display button (80)
Displays various information about the currently
selected input source.
N Setup button
Opens and closes the onscreen setup menus, which
are displayed on the connected TV.
O Tuning, Preset, Arrow, and Enter buttons
When AM or FM is selected, the Tuning [ ] [ ]
buttons are used for radio tuning, and the Preset
[ ] [ ] buttons are used to select radio presets
(see page 78). With the onscreen setup menus, they
work as arrow buttons and are used to select and set
items. The Enter button is also used with the
onscreen setup menus.
P Master Volume control (60)
Sets the volume of the AV receiver to –∞ dB,
–81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through +18.0 dB (relative display).
The volume level can also be displayed as an absolute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 106.
Q Zone 2, Zone 3, Level [ ]/[ ], and Off
buttons (115, 116)
The Zone 2 button is used when setting Zone 2.
The Zone 3 button is used when setting Zone 3.
The Level Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons are used
when adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
The Off button is used to turn off Zone 2 or Zone 3.
10
R Phones jack (80)
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a standard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.
S Audio Selector button (81)
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.
T Tone, Plus [+], and Minus [–] buttons (92,
116)
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble), and the
volume and balance of Zone 2 and Zone 3.
U Input selector buttons (60)
Select the following input sources: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, Game/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,
Tape, Tuner, CD, Phono.
V Return button
Selects the previously displayed onscreen setup
menu.
W Setup Mic (53)
The automatic speaker setup microphone connects
here.
X AUX 2 Input (38, 89)
Used to connect a camcorder, game console, and so
on. There are input jacks for optical digital audio,
S-Video, composite video, and analog audio.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 11 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
Display
1
2
6
3
7
4
8
9
0
5
A
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
1 Speaker/channel indicators (87)
Indicate the speaker configuration and channels
used by the current input source.
–
: A box is displayed for each speaker that’s set
in the Speaker Configuration. No box appears for
speakers that are set to No or None.
The following abbreviations indicate which audio
channels are included in the current input signal.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FL: Front left
C: Center
FR: Front right
SL: Surround left
LFE: Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects)
SR: Surround right
SBL: Surround back left
SB: Surround back
SBR: Surround back right
7 Headphone indicator (80)
Lights up when a pair of headphones are plugged
into the PHONES jack.
8 Message area
Displays various information.
9 Audio input indicators (81)
Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the
audio source: HDMI, ANALOG, or DIGITAL.
0 Volume level (60)
Displays the volume level.
A MUTING indicator (79)
Flashes while the AV receiver is muted.
2 ZONE 2 indicator (115)
Lights up when Powered Zone 2 is being used.
3 Listening mode and format indicators (82)
Show the selected listening mode and audio input
signal format.
4 Tuning indicators (61)
RDS (not North American model) (63):
Lights up when tuned to a radio station that supports
RDS (Radio Data System).
AUTO (61): Lights up when Auto Tuning mode is
selected for AM or FM radio. Goes off when Manual Tuning mode is selected.
TUNED (61): Lights up when tuned to a radio station.
FM STEREO (61): Lights up when tuned to a stereo FM station.
5 SLEEP indicator (80)
Lights up when the Sleep function has been set.
6 Audyssey indicator (53)
Lights up during automatic speaker setup.
11
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 12 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
Rear Panel
North American model only
678 9
12 34 5
J K LM N O P
Q
HDMI
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
XM
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
AM
SIRIUS
FM75
OUT 1
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
A
IN
ZONE 2
OUT
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
S
S
IN
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
IN 3
(CBL/SAT)
ZONE 3
CR/PR
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT
A
SURR BACK
OUT
CENTER
SURR
B
FRONT
SW
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
L
L
L
R
R
R
AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
FRONT R
DVD
SURR R
SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
CENTER
SURR L
PRE OUT
PRE OUT
SURR BACK L
FRONT L
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 L
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
R S T
A
U V W X YZ
ab
REMOTE CONTROL
This
(Remote Interactive) jack can be connected to the
jack on another
-capable Integra/Onkyo component for remote and system
control.
To use
, you must make an analog audio connection (RCA) between the AV receiver and the other
component, even if they are connected digitally.
B RS232
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to home
automation equipment and external controllers.
C PHONO IN
This audio input is for connecting a turntable.
D COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2, and 3
These RCA component video inputs are for connecting components with a component video output,
such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re assignable, which
means you can assign each one to an input selector
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Input
Setup” on page 48.
E COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1
This RCA component video output is for connecting a TV or projector with a component video input.
F COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/
ZONE 2 OUT
This RCA component video output is for connecting a TV or projector with a component video input
located in your main listening room or Zone 2.
12
c
d
e
f
g
G HDMI IN 1–3 and OUT
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) connections carry digital audio and digital video.
The HDMI inputs are for connecting components
with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, DVD
recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re
assignable, which means you can assign each one to
an input selector to suit your setup. See “HDMI
Input Setup” on page 46.
The HDMI output is for connecting a TV or projector with an HDMI input.
H SIRIUS antenna (on North American model)
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS digital
antenna, sold separately (see page 70).
I XM antenna (on North American model)
This jack is for connecting an XM Mini-Tuner and
Home Dock, sold separately (see page 65).
J MONITOR OUT
The S-Video or composite video jack should be
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.
K AM ANTENNA
These push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna.
L ZONE 2 OUT
This composite video output can be connected to a
video input on a TV in Zone 2.
M FM ANTENNA
This jack is for connecting an FM antenna.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 13 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued
N IR IN A/B and OUT
A commercially available IR receiver can be connected to the IR IN A or B jack, allowing you to
control the AV receiver while you’re in Zone 2, or
control it when it’s out of sight, for example,
installed in a cabinet.
A commercially available IR emitter can be connected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)
remote control signals through to other components.
O ETHERNET
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to home
automation equipment and external controllers. Use
only shielded Ethernet cables.
P 12V TRIGGER OUT (A/B/C)
These outputs can be connected to the 12-volt trigger inputs on other components.
Q AC INLET
The supplied power cord is connected here. The
other end of the power cord should be connected to
a suitable wall outlet.
R DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3
These coaxial digital audio inputs are for connecting components with a coaxial digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assignable, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input
Setup” on page 50.
S DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and OUT
These optical digital audio inputs are for connecting
components with an optical digital audio output,
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assignable, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input
Setup” on page 50.
The optical digital audio output is for connecting a
digital recorder with an optical digital input, such as
a CD recorder.
T GND screw
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground
wire.
U CD IN
This analog audio input is for connecting a CD
player’s analog audio output.
V TAPE IN/OUT
These analog audio input and output jacks are for
connecting a recorder with an analog audio input and
output, such as a cassette deck, MD recorder, etc.
W AUX 1 IN
A VCR for playback only or other video source can
be connected here. There’s S-Video and composite
video input jacks for connecting the video signal.
Y CBL/SAT IN
A cable or satellite receiver can be connected here.
There’s S-Video and composite video input jacks
for connecting the video signal.
Z VCR/DVR IN/OUT
A video component, such as a VCR or DVR, can be
connected here for recording and playback. There’s
S-Video and composite video input and output jacks
for connecting the video signal.
a DVD IN
This input is for connecting a DVD player. There’s
S-Video and composite video input jacks for connecting the video signal.
b FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, and SURR
BACK L/R SPEAKERS
These terminal posts are for connecting the front
L/R, center, surround L/R, and surround back L/R
speakers.
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal
posts can be used with front speakers and surround
back speakers respectively, or used to bi-amp the
front speakers. See “Bi-amping the Front Speakers”
on page 23.
c MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
This analog multichannel input is for connecting a
component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio output, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or
SACD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.
d PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER, SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK L/R
This 5.1/7.1 multichannel analog audio output can
be connected to the analog audio input on a multichannel power amplifier for when you want to use
the AV receiver solely as a preamplifier. The SUBWOOFER jack is for connecting a powered subwoofer.
e PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3
These analog audio outputs can be connected to the
line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3. The
SW jacks can be connected to the inputs on powered subwoofers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.
f ZONE 2 L/R SPEAKERS
These terminal posts are for connecting speakers in
Zone 2.
g AC OUTLET (North American model only)
These switched AC outlets can be used to supply
power to other AV components. The type and number of outlets depends on the country in which you
purchased your AV receiver.
X GAME/TV IN
A game console or TV output can be connected
here. There’s S-Video and composite video input
jacks for connecting the video signal.
See pages 20–42 for hookup information.
13
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 14 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Remote Controller
Installing the Batteries
1
To open the battery compartment, press
the small hollow and slide open the cover.
Using the Remote Controller
When using the remote controller, point it toward the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
Remote control sensor
Standby indicator
AV receiver
30˚
2
3
Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)
in accordance with the polarity diagram
inside the battery compartment.
Slide the cover shut.
Notes:
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try
replacing the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from
leakage or corrosion.
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possible to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.
14
30˚
Approx. 16 ft.
(5 m)
Notes:
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is subjected to bright light, such as direct sunlight or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this in
mind when installing.
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in
the same room, or the AV receiver is installed close to
equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote controller may not work reliably.
• Don’t put anything on top of the remote controller,
such as a book or magazine, because a button may be
pressed continuously, thereby draining the batteries.
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is installed in a rack behind colored glass
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an obstacle between it and the AV receiver’s remote control
sensor.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 15 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Remote Controller—Continued
About the Remote Controller Modes
As well as the AV receiver, you can also use the remote
controller to control your other AV components. The
remote controller has a specific operating mode for use
with each type of component. Modes are selected by
using the Remote Mode buttons.
Receiver/Tape Mode
Receiver/Tape mode is used to control the AV receiver.
It can also be used to control an Onkyo cassette recorder
connected via
.
To set the remote controller to Receiver/Tape mode,
press the [Receiver] Remote Mode button.
■ Receiver/Tape Mode
In Receiver/Tape mode, you can control the AV receiver
and an Onkyo cassette recorder connected via
.
A
■ DVD Mode
By default, you can control an Integra/Onkyo DVD
player in this mode. By entering the appropriate remote
control code, you can control components made by other
manufacturers (see page 119).
■ CD/CDR/MD Mode
By default, you can control an Integra/Onkyo CD player
in this mode. By entering the appropriate remote control
code, you can control a CD player, MD recorder, or CD
recorder made by another manufacturer (see page 119).
■ Dock Mode
This mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo
RI Dock.
By default, you can control an RI Dock that has a remote
control sensor such as DS-A2. When operating an RI
Dock with
connection, you can control it by entering
the appropriate remote control code (see page 119).
■ TV and VCR Modes
With these modes, you can control a TV and VCR. You
must enter the appropriate remote control code first (see
page 119).
■ Cable/SAT Mode
In Cable/SAT mode, you can control a cable or satellite
TV receiver. You must enter the appropriate remote control code first (see page 119).
■ Zone 2/Zone 3 Modes
These modes are for controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see
page 115).
1
Use the Remote Mode buttons to select a
mode.
2
Use the buttons supported by that mode
to control the component.
Receiver/Tape mode: see page 15
DVD mode: see page 17
CD/MD/CDR mode: see page 18
Dock mode: see page 19
TV, VCR, Cable/SAT modes: see page 121
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
B
C
TV
Input
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
L
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
M
12
Macro
D
1
2
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CDR/MD
TV
Tape/AMP
5
F
Zone2
CD
Receiver
Cable
Dock
SAT
Top
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Men
Men
u
N
O
u
+
G
H
I
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
VOL
Q
R
t
Ex i
e
rn
Retu
tu p
Display
P
Muting
1
Rec
Playlist
Random
Listening Mode
J
K
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
Direct
THX
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close
Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
Re-EQ
VCR
DVD
HDD
RC-691M
S
T
U
Note:
• Some of the remote controller functions described in
this manual may not work as expected with other components.
15
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 16 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Remote Controller—Continued
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
T L Night button (91)
Turns the Late Night function on or off.
A Standby button (43)
Sets the AV receiver to Standby.
B On button (43)
U Audio Sel button (81)
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.
Turns on the AV receiver.
C Input Selector buttons (60)
Used to select the input source.
D Macro buttons (123)
Used with the Macro function.
E Dimmer button (79)
Adjusts the display brightness.
F Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons
Used to select and adjust settings.
G CH +/– button (78)
Selects radio presets.
H Setup button
Used to change settings.
I Display button (80)
Displays information about the current input source.
J Listening Mode buttons (82)
Used to select the listening modes. The [Stereo],
[Surround], and Listening Mode [ ]/[ ] buttons
can be used at any time, regardless of the currently
selected remote controller mode.
K Test Tone, CH Sel, Level–, and Level+
buttons (79, 100)
Used to adjust the level of each speaker.
L Light button
Turns the remote controller’s illuminated buttons on
or off.
M D.TUN button (62)
Selects the Direct tuning mode for radio.
N Remote Mode buttons (15)
Used to select the remote controller modes. When
you press a button, the Remote Mode button for the
currently selected mode lights up.
O Sleep button (80)
Used with the Sleep function.
P VOL [ ]/[ ] button (60)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver regardless of
the currently selected remote controller mode.
Q Return button
Returns to the previous display when changing settings.
R Muting button (79)
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
S Re-EQ button (91)
Turns the Re-EQ function on or off.
16
■ TAPE mode
On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.
1 Previous and Next [
]/[
] buttons
The Previous [
] button selects the previous
track. During playback it selects the beginning of
the current track. The Next [
] button selects the
next track.
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous
and Next [
]/[
] buttons may not work properly with some cassette tapes.
Play [ ] button
Starts playback.
Rewind and Fast Forward [ ]/[ ] buttons
The Rewind [ ] button starts rewind. The Fast
Forward [ ] button starts fast forward.
Reverse Play [ ] button
Starts reverse playback.
Stop [ ] button
Stops playback.
Rec [ ] button
Starts recording.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 17 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Remote Controller—Continued
A Standby button
DVD Mode
Sets the DVD player to Standby.
To set the remote controller to DVD mode, press the
[DVD] Remote Mode button.
B On button
Turns on the DVD player.
C Number buttons
Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and
to enter times for locating specific points.
D Top Menu button
Selects a DVD’s top menu.
A
B
C
E Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
Used to navigate menus and select items.
TV
Input
F Disc +/– button
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
-
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
G Setup button
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
Selects discs on a DVD changer.
0
H Display button
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
M
12
Macro
1
2
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
TV
D
Cable
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
E
M
Top
DVD
Receiver
Men
enu
N
G
H
Used with the repeat playback function.
Enter
Disc
Album
VOL
K Audio button
-
Gu
id
Se
O
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
rn
Display
Muting
Opens and closes the disc tray.
Rec
Playlist
Random
M Clear button
P
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
Direct
THX
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close
Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
Re-EQ
VCR
DVD
HDD
RC-691M
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
N Menu button
Listening Mode
L
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio formats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).
L Open/Close [ ] button
I
J
K
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
Pause, Stop, Fast Forward, Slow Reverse, and Slow
Forward.
J Repeat button
CH
Prev
CH
I Playback buttons
u
+
F
Displays information about the current disc, title,
chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining
time, total time, and so on.
Displays a DVD’s menu.
Q
R
O Return button
Exits the DVD player’s onscreen setup menu.
P Random button
S
Used with the random playback function.
Q Play Mode button
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
R Subtitle button
Selects subtitles.
S Video Off button
Turns off the internal video circuitry, eliminating
any possibility of interference.
17
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 18 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Remote Controller—Continued
A Standby button
CD/MD/CDR Modes
Sets the component to Standby.
To control an Integra/Onkyo CD player, MD
recorder, or CD recorder, or a CD or MD
player/recorder made by another manufacturer,
press the [CD] Remote Mode button to select the
CD/MD/CDR remote controller mode.
In order to control an Onkyo MD recorder or CD
recorder, or a component made by another manufacturer,
you must first enter the appropriate remote control code
(see page 119).
B On button
Set the component to On or Standby.
C Number buttons
Used to enter track numbers and times for locating
specific points.
D Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons
Used with some components.
E Disc +/– button
Selects discs on a CD changer.
F Display button
Displays information about the current disc or track,
including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,
and so on.
A
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
-
TV
B
C
Input
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
Pause, Stop, and Fast Forward.
H Rec [ ] button
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
G Playback buttons
0
Starts recording.
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
K
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
CD
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
D
To
CDR/MD
Men
L Return button
Used with some components.
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
-
F
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
M Random button
VOL
Used with the random playback function.
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
N Play Mode button
rn
Display
Muting
L
7
8
Rec
Playlist
Random
M
Listening Mode
9
J
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
Direct
THX
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close
Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
Re-EQ
VCR
DVD
HDD
RC-691M
18
Opens or closes the disc tray or ejects the MiniDisc.
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
u
+
E
J Open/Close [ ] button
K Clear button
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
u
Used with the repeat playback function.
Zone3
3
en
pM
I Repeat button
N
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 19 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Remote Controller—Continued
A Standby button
Dock Mode
Turns off the iPod.
Dock mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo
RI Dock.
When Using an RI Dock:
• Connect the RI Dock to the TAPE IN or GAME/TV
IN L/R jacks.
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or
HDD/DOCK.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see
page 49).
• When operating a DS-A1 RI Dock, enter the appropriate remote control code for the first time (see
page 119).
• See to the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more
information.
To set the remote controller to DOCK mode, press the
[DOCK] REMOTE MODE button.
B On button*
Turns on the iPod.
C Top Menu button
Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
D Arrow [ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons*
Used to navigate menus and select items.
E Album +/– button*
Selects the next or previous album.
F Display button*
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.
G Previous [
] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.
H Pause [ ] button
Pauses playback. (With 3rd generation iPods, it
works as a Play/Pause button.)
A
I Rewind [
] button
Press and hold to rewind.
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
TV
B
Input
]/[ ] buttons*
Used to select the previous or next playlist on the
iPod.
K Repeat button*
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
J Playlist [
0
Used with the repeat function.
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
L Menu button*
12
Used to access menus.
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
Zone3
3
M Play [ ] button
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
TV
C
4
Cable
Dock
SAT
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
Dock
Men
u
Men
L
u
+
CH
5
6
7
8
9
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
] button
Selects the next song.
O Stop [ ] button
VOL
P Fast Forward [
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
rn
Display
Rec
N Next [
Stops playback and displays a menu.
-
J
K
Enter
Disc
Album
Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn
on automatically. (With 3rd generation iPods, this
button works as a Play/Pause button.)
Muting
Playlist
Random
M
N
O
P
Q
Listening Mode
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
Direct
THX
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close
Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
Re-EQ
VCR
DVD
HDD
R
] button
Press and hold to fast forward.
Q Random button*
Used with the shuffle function.
R Play Mode button
Used to select play modes on components with
selectable play modes.
Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported
by 3rd generation iPods.
RC-691M
19
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 20 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Speakers
Enjoying Home Theater
Thanks to the AV receiver’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. You can enjoy DVDs featuring Dolby Digital or DTS.
With analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes.
You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).
Front left and right speakers
These output the main sound. Their role in a home theater is to provide a solid
anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the listener at
about ear level, and equally spaced from the TV. Angle them inward slightly so
as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.
Center speaker
This speaker enhances the front left
and right speakers, making sound
movements distinct and providing a
full sound image. For movies it’s used
mainly for dialog.
Position it close to your TV (preferably
on top) facing forward at about ear
level, or at the same height as the
front left and right speakers.
Subwoofer
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of
the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel.
The volume and quality of the bass output
from your subwoofer will depend on its position, the shape of your listening room, and
your listening position. In general, a good bass
sound can be obtained by installing the subwoofer in a front corner, or at one-third the way
along the front wall, as shown.
Surround back left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital
EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround
EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound
and improve sound localization behind the listener. Position them behind the listener about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level.
Tip: To find the best position for your subwoofer, while playing a movie or some music
with good bass, experiment by placing your
subwoofer at various positions within the
room and choose the
one that provides
the most satisfying
results.
Corner
position
1/3 of wall
position
20
Surround left and right speakers
These speakers are used for precise
sound positioning and to add realistic
ambience.
Position them at the sides of the listener, or slightly behind, about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level. Ideally
they should be equally spaced from the
listener.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 21 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Speakers—Continued
Connecting a Powered Subwoofer
Connecting Your Speakers
Speaker Configuration
For the best surround-sound experience, you should connect seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.
The following table shows which channels you should
use based on the number of speakers you have.
Using a suitable cable, connect the AV receiver’s SUBWOOFER PRE OUT to the input on your powered subwoofer. If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re
using an external amplifier, connect the SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT to the amp’s input.
Number of speakers:
2
3
4
5
6
7
Front left
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
DIGITAL
Front right
✓
✓
✓
IN 3
HDMI
Powered
subwoofer
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 3
✓
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
ETHERNET
AM
FM75
OUT 1
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
Center
IN 2
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
CR/PR
S
S
IN
L
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
LINE INPUT
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
FRONT R
DVD
SURR R
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
SURR L
PRE OUT
FRONT L
PR
S
IN 2
Surround left
✓
✓
✓
✓
Surround right
✓
✓
✓
✓
(CD)
OUT
LINE INPUT
✓
Surround back*
Surround back left
✓
Surround back right
✓
SUBWOOFER
* If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the
SURR BACK L terminals.
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered subwoofer is recommended for a powerful and solid bass.
To get the best from your surround-sound system, you
must set the speaker settings. You can do this automatically (see page 53) or manually (see page 96).
Using Dipole Speakers
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and
right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole
speakers output the same sound in two directions.
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to
indicate how they should be positioned. The surround left
and right dipole speakers should be positioned so that their
arrows point toward your TV or screen, while the surround
back left and right dipolar speakers should be positioned
so that their arrows point toward each other, as shown.
Normal speakers
Dipole speakers
1
TV/screen
2
5
6
7
8
1. Subwoofer
2. Front left speaker
3. Center speaker
4. Front right speaker
5. Surround left speaker
Attaching the Speaker Labels
The AV receiver’s positive (+) speaker terminals are
color-coded for ease of identification. (The negative (–)
speaker terminals are all black.)
Speaker terminal
Front left, Zone 2 left
Front right, Zone 2 right
Center
Surround left
Surround right
Surround back left
Surround back right
Color
White
Red
Green
Blue
Gray
Brown
Tan
The supplied speaker labels are also color-coded and you
should attach them to the positive (+) side of each
speaker cable in accordance with the above table. All you
need to do then is to match the color of each label to the
corresponding speaker terminal.
1
TV/screen
4
3
2
4
3
PRE OUT
5
6
7
8
6. Surround right speaker
7. Surround back left
speaker
8. Surround back right
speaker
21
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 22 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Speakers—Continued
Speaker Connection Precautions
Read the following before connecting your speakers:
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the
connected speakers is 4 ohms or more but less than 6,
be sure to set the speaker impedance to 4 ohms (see
page 44). If you use speakers with a lower impedance,
and use the amplifier at high volume levels for a long
period of time, the built-in amp protection circuit may
be activated.
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before
making any connections.
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. Connect
positive (+) terminals to only positive (+) terminals,
and negative (–) terminals to only negative (–) terminals. If you get them the wrong way around, the sound
will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.
• Unnecessarily long or very thin speaker cables may
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
• Be careful not to short the
positive and negative wires.
Doing so may damage the AV
receiver.
• Don’t connect more than one
cable to each speaker terminal. Doing so may damage the
AV receiver.
• Don’t connect a speaker to several terminals.
Connecting the Speaker Cables
1
Strip about 5/8" (15
mm) of insulation from
the ends of the
speaker cables, and
twist the bare wires
tightly, as shown.
2
5/8" (15 mm)
3
Fully insert the bare wire.
4
Screw the terminal tight.
Unscrew the terminal.
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals.
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.
Front right speaker
HDMI
Center speaker
Front left speaker
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
OUT 1
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
SURR BACK R
C
Bi-AMP
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
S
S
IN
IN 3
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
FRONT R
SURR R
CENTER
SURR L
FRONT L
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
ZONE 3
CR/PR
SW
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
L
L
L
R
R
R
(CBL/SAT)
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
SURR L
PRE OUT
FRONT L
PRE OUT
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 L
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
Surround back
right speaker
22
Surround right
speaker
Surround left
speaker
Surround back
left speaker
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 23 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Speakers—Continued
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup
Bi-amping the Front Speakers
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate
tweeter and woofer feeds for a pair of front speakers that
support bi-amping, providing improved bass and treble
performance.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R terminal posts connect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the
SURR BACK L/R terminal posts connect to the front
speakers’ woofer terminals.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the Speaker Type setting to Bi-Amp to enable biamping (see page 44).
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure
to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
1
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT R negative (–) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.
2
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK R negative (–) terminal to
the right speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) terminal.
3
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT L negative (–) terminal to the left
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.
4
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+)
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
receiver’s SURR BACK L negative (–) terminal to
the left speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) terminal.
HDMI
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
OUT 1
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
S
S
IN
IN 2
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
SW
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
L
IN 3
ZONE 3
CR/PR
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
TAPE
AUX 1
SURR BACK R
ZONE2 R
Bi-AMP
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
CENTER
SURR L
PRE OUT
PRE OUT
FRONT L
SURR BACK L
ZONE2 L
Bi-AMP
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
FRONT R
FRONT L
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
Woofer (low)
Tweeter (high)
Right speaker
Left speaker
23
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 24 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Antennas
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without
any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna
to use the tuner.
AM antenna push terminals
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use
only.
ANTENNA
AM
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead (see page 25).
FM75
1
Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting
the tabs into the base, as shown.
2
Connect both wires of the AM loop
antenna to the AM push terminals, as
shown.
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so
they can be connected either way around).
FM antenna jack
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.
1
Attach the FM antenna, as shown.
■ American Model
Make sure that the wires are attached securely and
that the push terminals are gripping the bare
wires, not the insulation.
FM75
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
■ Other Models
Push
FM75
Insert wire
Release
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
2
Use thumbtacks or something similar to
fix the FM antenna into position.
Thumbtacks, etc.
Caution: Be careful that you don’t injure yourself
when using thumbtacks.
24
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust
the position of the AM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from
your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power
cords.
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 25).
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 25 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Antennas—Continued
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna instead.
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied
AM loop antenna, an outdoor AM antenna can be used in
addition to the loop antenna, as shown.
Outdoor antenna
FM 75
Insulated antenna cable
AM loop antenna
Notes:
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an
attic or loft.
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line
of sight to your local FM transmitter.
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possible noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated
well away from power lines and other high-voltage
equipment.
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.
Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed horizontally outside, but good results can sometimes be obtained
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.
■ Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If circumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as
shown.
TV/FM antenna splitter
To AV receiver
To TV (or VCR)
25
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 26 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components
AV Connection Color Coding
About AV Connections
RCA-type AV connections are usually color coded: red,
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect rightchannel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).
Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and
outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to
connect composite video inputs and outputs.
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals
supplied with your other AV components.
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed
and double-checked all AV connections.
Optical Digital Jacks
Left (white)
The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and
close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.
Analog audio
Right (red)
(Yellow)
Caution: To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical
plug straight when inserting and removing.
Left (white)
Right (red)
Composite video
• Push plugs in all the way to make
good connections (loose connections can cause noise or malfunctions).
• To prevent interference, keep
audio and video cables away from
power cords and speaker cables.
(Yellow)
Right!
Wrong!
AV Cables and Jacks
Video
Cable
Jack
Description
HDMI connections can carry uncompressed standard- or high-definition digital video and audio and
offer the best picture and sound quality.
HDMI
HDMI
Component
video cable
Y
Y
PB
PB
PR
PR
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best
picture quality. (Some TV manufacturers label their
component video jacks slightly differently.)
Y
CB/PB
CR/PR
S-Video cable
S
S-Video separates the luminance and color signals
and provides better picture quality than composite
video.
Composite
video cable
V
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,
and other video equipment.
Audio
Optical digital
audio cable
OPTICAL
Coaxial digital
audio cable
COAXIAL
R
FRONT
Multichannel
analog audio
cable (RCA)
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURR
SURR BACK
MULTI CH
Note: The AV receiver does not support SCART connections.
26
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is
the same as for optical.
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most
common connection format for analog audio and
can be found on virtually all AV components.
L
Analog audio
cable (RCA)
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is
the same as for coaxial.
This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1channel analog audio output. Several standard
analog audio cables can be used instead of a multichannel cable.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 27 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting Audio and Video Signals to the AV Receiver
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD player and other AV components to the AV receiver, you
can switch the audio and video signals simultaneously simply by changing the input source on the AV receiver.
: Signal Flow
Video
Video
Audio
Audio
TV, projector,
etc.
DVD player, etc.
Speakers (see page 22 for hookup details)
Which Connections Should I Use?
The AV receiver supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.
For video components, you must make an audio connection and a video connection.
Video Connection Formats
Video equipment can be connected to the AV receiver by using any one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.
The AV receiver can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the HDMI Monitor setting,
which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI output.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconversion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). It’s also recommended that you set the
Immediate Display preference to Off (page 107).
■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to Yes
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to Yes (see
page 45), video input signals flow through the
AV receiver as shown, with composite video,
S-Video, and component video sources all
being upconverted for the HDMI output. Use
this setting if you connect the AV receiver’s
HDMI OUT to your TV.
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective
input signals as they are.
Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
IN
AV receiver
MONITOR OUT
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
TV, projector, etc.
27
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 28 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to No
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to No (see
page 45), video input signals flow through the
AV receiver as shown, with composite video
and S-Video sources being upconverted for the
component video output. Use this setting if
you connect the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to your TV.
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video
and S-Video is downconverted to composite
video. Note that these conversions only apply
to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not
the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video pass through their respective input signals as they are.
Video Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
IN
AV receiver
MONITOR OUT
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
TV, projector, etc.
Audio Connection Formats
Audio equipment can be connected to the AV
receiver by using any of the following audio
connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial,
analog multichannel, or HDMI.
When choosing a connection format, bear in
mind that the AV receiver does not convert digital input signals for analog line outputs and
vice versa. For example, audio signals connected to an optical or coaxial digital input are
not output by the analog TAPE OUT.
Audio Signal Flow Chart
DVD player, etc.
Optical
HDMI
Optical
Coaxial
Analog
Multichannel
AV receiver
MD recorder, etc.
28
HDMI
Analog
* 1 Only the front L/R channels are output.
* 2 Depends on the HDMI Audio setting (see page 109).
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 29 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a TV or Projector
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your TV ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
a and b , or a and c .)
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
TV
Picture quality
A
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1
Best
MONITOR OUT S
S-Video input
Better
C
MONITOR OUT V
Composite video input
Standard
a
GAME/TV IN L/R
b
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
c
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇐
⇐
⇐
Component video input
B
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
OUT 1
C
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
DVD
VCR/DVR
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
b
IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
CR/PR
c
S
S
IN
IN
L
IN 3
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
B
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
AUX 1
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
FRONT R
DVD
SURR R
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
CENTER
a
SURR L
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
FRONT L
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
A
L
COAXIAL
OUT
Connect one
or the other
Hint!
OPTICAL
OUT
PR
Y
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
R
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
TV, projector,
etc.
If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite
receiver to the AV receiver and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV receiver (see
pages 32 and 34).
29
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 30 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a DVD player
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
If you use connection A , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from a DVD or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
a and b , or a and c .)
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the
main left and right outputs for connection a .
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
DVD player
A
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1
Component video output
Best
B
DVD IN S
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
S-Video output
Better
Composite video output
Standard
C
DVD IN V
a
DVD IN L/R
b
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1
c
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
Picture quality
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
OUT 1
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
b
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
DVD
VCR/DVR
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
C
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
S
IN
IN 2
IN 3
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
CENTER
(VCR/DVR)
L
c
IN
OUT
B
SURR
SURR BACK
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
AUX 1
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
FRONT R
DVD
SURR R
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
MULTI CH
a
SURR L
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
FRONT L
IN 2
A
(CD)
OUT
L
COAXIAL
OUT
Connect one
or the other
OPTICAL
OUT
PR
Y
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
R
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
DVD player
To connect a DVD player or DVD-Audio/SACD-capable player with a
multichannel analog audio output, see page 31.
30
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 31 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Hooking Up the Multichannel Input
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and SACD, and it has a multichannel
analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV receiver’s multichannel input.
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV receiver’s MULTI CH FRONT
L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK L/R, and SUBWOOFER jacks to the 7.1-channel analog audio output on your
DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the AV receiver’s
SURR BACK L/R jacks.
Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Input Setup” on page 52. To
select the multichannel input, see “Selecting Audio Inputs” on page 81. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the
multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” on page 109.
HDMI
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
7.1 ch
5.1 ch
OUT 1
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
S
S
IN
IN 2
IN 3
ZONE 3
CR/PR
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
SW
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
FRONT
L
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
R
R
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
(CBL/SAT)
L
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
SURR L
PRE OUT
R
L
PRE OUT
FRONT L
SURR BACK L
IN 2
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 L
R
(CD)
R
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
OUT
L
R
FRONT
L
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURR
BACK
DVD player
31
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 32 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback
With this hookup, you can use the tuner in your VCR or DVR to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Hint!
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection. If you use
connection A , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to the VCR or DVR in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use a and
b , or a and c .)
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
VCR or DVR
A
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2
Component video output
Best
B
VCR/DVR IN S
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
S-Video output
Better
Composite video output
Standard
C
VCR/DVR IN V
a
VCR/DVR IN L/R
b
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
c
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
Picture quality
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
OUT 1
C
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
b
IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
CR/PR
S
S
IN
L
IN 3
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
B
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
c
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
AUX 1
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
FRONT R
DVD
SURR R
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
A
L
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
R
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
Connect one
or the other
VCR or DVR
32
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
VIDEO
OUT
MULTI CH
a
SURR L
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
FRONT L
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 33 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( A or B ), and then make the connection. The video
source to be recorded must be connected to the AV receiver via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( a or b ), and then make the connection.
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
VCR or DVD recorder
A
VCR/DVR OUT S
S-Video input
Better
B
VCR/DVR OUT V
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇒
Composite video input
Standard
a
VCR/DVR OUT L/R
b
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT
Picture quality
Audio L/R input
Digital optical input
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
OUT 1
B
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
CR/PR
S
S
IN
L
IN 3
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
CENTER
A
SURR
SURR BACK
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
b
GND
CD
TAPE
AUX 1
SURR BACK R
ZONE2 R
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
Bi-AMP
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
a
MULTI CH
SURR L
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
FRONT L
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
L
OPTICAL
IN
R
AUDIO
IN
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
VCR or DVR
Notes:
• The AV receiver must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s on Standby.
• If you want to record directly from your TV or another video source without going through the AV receiver, connect
the audio and video outputs from your TV or other video component directly to the recording VCR/DVR’s audio and
video inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV or VCR/DVR for details.
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR OUT V jack. So if your
source TV or VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be connected to the
VCR/DVR OUT V jack. Likewise, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR
OUT S jack. So if your source TV or VCR is connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be
connected to the VCR/DVR OUT S jack.
33
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 34 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial Set-top box or Other Video Source
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Hint!
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches the video source ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
If you use connection A , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches the video source ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
a and b , or a and c .)
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
Video source
Picture quality
A
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3
Best
B
CBL/SAT IN S
C
CBL/SAT IN V
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
Component video output
a
CBL/SAT IN L/R
b
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3
c
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2
S-Video output
Better
Composite video output
Standard
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
OUT 1
C
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
DVD
VCR/DVR
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
CR/PR
S
S
IN
b
L
IN 3
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
R
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
AUX 1
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
FRONT R
DVD
SURR R
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
A
L
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
R
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
Connect one
or the other
Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.
34
B
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
R
PHONO
IN 1
COAXIAL
OUT
B
FRONT
(CBL/SAT)
OPTICAL
c
A
SURR BACK
L
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
MULTI CH
a
SURR L
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
FRONT L
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 35 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting Components with HDMI
About HDMI
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until now,
several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can
carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital
audio, or multichannel PCM).
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface),*1 so TVs and displays
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and
displays, resulting in no picture.)
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), so only HDCP-compatible components will
display a picture.
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:
High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Informational Version 1.3a
Supported Audio Formats
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS-HD Master Audio)
Your DVD player must be able to output these formats from its HDMI OUT.
About Copyright Protection
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection),*2 a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also support HDCP.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable (supplied with some components) to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT
to the HDMI input on your TV or projector.
*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to
protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open
industry group’s objective is to address the industry's requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.
35
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 36 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Making HDMI Connections
Step 1: Use HDMI cables to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible DVD player, TV,
projector, and so on.
Step 2: Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector. See “HDMI Input Setup” on page 46.
■ Video Signals
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI OUT for display on your TV.
Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the HDMI output. See “Video Connection Formats” on page 27 for more information.
■ Audio Signals
Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV
receiver. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI OUT, unless the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see
page 109).
Hint!
To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers, set the HDMI Audio
Out setting to On (see page 109), and set your DVD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM.
When listening to audio from an HDMI component through the AV receiver’s speakers, set the HDMI
component so that its video can be seen on your TV (e.g., on your TV, select the input to which the
HDMI component is connected). If your TV is not turned on or a different input is selected, the AV
receiver's speakers may produce no sound or the sound may be cut off.
Note:
• When the HDMI Audio setting is set to On (see page 109), or TV Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers, if you turn up the AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output by the AV receiver’s
speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn
down the AV receiver’s volume.
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
IN
TV
DVD player
HDMI
HDMI
IN 1
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
OUT 1
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
S
S
IN
IN 2
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
SW
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
L
IN 3
ZONE 3
CR/PR
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
36
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
SURR L
PRE OUT
FRONT L
PRE OUT
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 37 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a Game Console
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your game console ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
If you use connection A , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use a
and b .)
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
Game console
A
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3
Component video output
Best
B
GAME/TV IN S
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
S-Video output
Better
Composite video output
Standard
C
GAME/TV IN V
a
GAME/TV IN L/R
b
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1
Picture quality
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
OUT 1
C
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
DVD
VCR/DVR
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
S
IN
IN 2
IN 3
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
(VCR/DVR)
L
b
IN
OUT
B
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
AUX 1
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
FRONT R
DVD
SURR R
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
MULTI CH
a
SURR L
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
FRONT L
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
A
L
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
R
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
Game Console
37
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 38 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your camcorder ( A or B ), and then make the connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( a or b ), and then make the connection.
b
Input
Digital
a
L Audio R
Input
Input
Video
Input
S Video
A
B
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
L AUDIO R
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
Camcorder, etc.
38
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
A
AUX 2 Input S Video
B
AUX 2 Input Video
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
a
AUX 2 Input L/R
b
AUX 2 Input Digital
Camcorder
S-Video output
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital optical output
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 39 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a CD Player
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your CD player ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
HDMI
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
IN 3
b
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
a
OUT
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
OUT 1
Y
COAXIAL
IN 2
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
MONITOR
OUT V
DVD
VCR/DVR
IR
CB/PB
A
IN
ZONE 2
OUT
B
IN
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE 2
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
S
IN
IN 2
IN
IN 3
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
SW
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
L
R
(CBL/SAT)
R
c
ZONE 3
L
COAXIAL
IN 1
R
R
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
OPTICAL
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
TAPE
AUX 1
SURR BACK R
ZONE2 R
Bi-AMP
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
FRONT R
SUBWOOFER
DVD
SURR R
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
CENTER
PRE OUT
SURR L
PRE OUT
CD
SURR BACK L
FRONT L
ZONE2 L
Bi-AMP
IN 2
(CD)
IN 2
OUT
L
Connect one or the other
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
R
AUDIO
OUT
CD player
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from the CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,
use a and b , or a and c .)
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
CD
a
CD IN L/R
Analog audio L/R output
b
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
c
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2
⇐
⇐
⇐
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Connecting a Turntable
The AV receiver’s PHONO IN is designed for use with a
moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.
HDMI
Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turntable.
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
OUT 1
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1
Notes:
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the
AV receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, connecting the ground wire may produce an audible hum.
If this happens, disconnect it.
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type cartridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head
amp or MC transformer. Connect your turntable to the
head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV
receiver’s PHONO IN L/R jacks.
• You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turntable with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono
equalizer’s manual for details.
(DVD)
S
S
IN
IN 2
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
L
IN 3
ZONE 3
CR/PR
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
CENTER
SURR L
IN
IN 2
PRE OUT
FRONT L
PRE OUT
SURR BACK
Bi-AMP
(CD)
OUT
L
R
PHONO
AUDIO
OUTPUT
L
R
39
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 40 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your recorder ( a , b , c , or d ), and then make the connection.
b
a
IN
COAXIAL
IN 2
HDMI
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
AC INLET
L
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
R
OUT 1
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
c
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
DVD
VCR/DVR
MONITOR
OUT V
IR
CB/PB
A
IN
ZONE 2
OUT
B
C
TAPE
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
S
S
IN
IN 2
L
IN 3
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
A
SURR BACK
OUT
CENTER
SURR
SW
B
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
R
L
L
R
OPTICAL
PHONO
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
TAPE
AUX 1
SURR BACK R
ZONE2 R
Bi-AMP
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
FRONT R
SUBWOOFER
DVD
SURR R
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
CENTER
R
PRE OUT
SURR L
PRE OUT
SURR BACK L
FRONT L
ZONE2 L
Bi-AMP
R
IN 2
OPTICAL
a
SURR BACK
L
(CBL/SAT)
IN 1
d
ZONE 3
CR/PR
(CD)
OUT
TAPE
Connect one
or the other
L
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
OPTICAL
IN
R
L
R
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
OUT
Cassette, CDR, MD, etc.
• With connection a , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections a and b , or a and c .
• To connect the recorder digitally for recording, use connection d .
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
a
TAPE IN L/R
TAPE OUT L/R
b
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2
c
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2
d
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT
Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder
⇐
⇒
⇐
⇐
⇒
Analog audio L/R output
Analog audio L/R input
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
Digital optical input
Connecting a Power Amplifier
If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier and
use the AV receiver solely as a preamp, connect the amp
to the PRE OUT jacks, and connect all speakers and the
subwoofer to the power amplifier. If you have a powered
subwoofer, connect it to the AV receiver’s PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER jack.
3
RS232
OUT
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
OUT 1
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
S
S
IN
IN 2
IN 3
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
SW
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
L
L
L
R
R
R
(CBL/SAT)
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
PRE OUT
SURR L
FRONT L
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
1. Subwoofer
2. Front left speaker
3. Center speaker
4. Front right speaker
5. Surround left speaker
6. Surround right speaker
7. Surround back left
speaker
8. Surround back right
speaker
1
2
3
4
FRONT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
5
Power amplifier
40
ZONE 3
CR/PR
6
7
8
FRONT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
SURR
SURR BACK
PRE OUT
SURR
SURR BACK
PRE OUT
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 41 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting an RI Dock
■ If Your iPod Doesn’t Support Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks.
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)
■ If Your iPod Supports Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks, and connect
its video output jack to the AV receiver’s GAME/TV
IN V jack.
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)
IN
HDMI
L
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
COMPONENT VIDEO
R
GAME/TV
IN 3
HDMI
IN 3
RS232
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
IN 2
I
V
GAME/TV
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
IN 3
(CBL/SAT)
S
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
CB/PB
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
L
IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
IN 3
(CBL/SAT)
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
CR/PR
IN
V
IN
AUX 1
CB/PB
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
OUT 1
Y
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
IN 1
OUT 1
Y
ASSIGNABLE
V
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
CR/PR
IN
L
L
R
R
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OU
OPTICAL
S
IN
L
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
PHONO
IN 1
IN
(GAME/TV)
L
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
IN 2
(CD)
R
R
OUT
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GAME/TV
R
OPTICAL
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SA
FRONT R
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
■ If you have an Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock
• Connect its video output jack to the AV receiver’s
GAME/TV IN S jack.
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before
using the AV receiver’s remote controller for the first
time (see page 119).
Notes:
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an
cable (see page 42).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or HDD/DOCK.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see page 49).
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components (North American model only)
The AV receiver has AC outlets on its rear panel that can be used to
connect the power cords of other components that you intend to use with
the AV receiver. These components can then be left turned on so that
they turn on and off as and when the AV receiver is set to On or Standby.
Caution:
• Make sure that the total capacity of the components that you connect
to the AC OUTLETS does not exceed the stated capacity (e.g.,
TOTAL 120 W).
Notes:
• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable (page 109), the AC
outlets are on all the time regardless of whether the AV receiver is set
to On or Standby, or Ready mode in this case, so any components
connected to them cannot be turned on or off automatically.
• Integra/Onkyo components connected via
should be connected
directly to a wall outlet, not an AC OUTLET on the AV receiver.
AC INLET
AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.
41
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 42 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Connecting Your Components—Continued
Connecting Integra/Onkyo
Components
Step 1: Make sure that each Integra/Onkyo component is connected to the AV receiver with an analog audio cable
(RCA).
Step 2: Make the necessary
connections (see illustration below).
Step 3: If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI DOCK component, change the Input Display (see page 49).
With
(Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:
Auto Power On/Standby
When you start playback on a component connected via
, if the AV receiver is on Standby, it will automatically turn
on and select that component as the input source. Similarly, when the AV receiver is set to Standby, all components
connected via
will also go on Standby. This function will not work with components that are connected to an AC
OUTLET on the AV receiver.
Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected via
, the AV receiver automatically selects that component as
the input source. If your DVD player is connected to the AV receiver’s multichannel input, you’ll need to press the
[Audio Selector] button repeatedly and select Multich to hear all channels (see page 81), as the Direct Change
function selects the DVD IN L/R jacks.
Remote Control
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control your other
-capable Integra/Onkyo components. You must
enter the appropriate remote control code first (see page 120). And remember to point the remote controller at the AV
receiver and not the other component.
Notes:
• Use only
cables for
connections.
cables
are supplied with Integra/Onkyo players (DVD, CD,
etc.).
• Some components have two
jacks. You can connect either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is
for connecting additional
-capable components.
• Connect only Integra/Onkyo components to
jacks. Connecting other manufacturer’s components
may cause a malfunction.
• Some components may not support all
functions.
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Integra/Onkyo components.
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power
On/Standby and Direct Change
functions do not
work.
IN
L
R
HDMI
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
CD
OUT
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
AM
FM75
OUT 1
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
IN 3
(CBL/SAT)
ZONE 3
FRONT
CR/PR
S
S
IN
L
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
SW
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
L
L
R
L
R
R
OPTICAL
REMOTE
CONTROL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
SURR L
PRE OUT
FRONT L
PRE OUT
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
ZONE2 L
R
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
DVD
e.g., CD player
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
e.g., DVD player
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
Connecting the Power Cord
•
•
•
•
42
Before connecting the power cord, connect all your speakers and AV components.
Connect the power cord to the AV receiver’s AC INLET.
Plug the other end of the power cord into a suitable wall outlet.
Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment
on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different branch circuit.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 43 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Turning On the AV Receiver
• North American model
• Other models
Standby/On
Standby indicator
Standby
Standby/On
Standby indicator
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
TV
On
Input
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
3
Zone3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
CD
Zone2
CDR/MD
Receiver
SAT
Dimmer
Dock
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Turning On and Standby
On the AV receiver, press the [Standby/On] button.
Remote
controller
AV receiver
Receiver
or
On the remote controller, press the [Receiver] Remote Mode button, followed by the [On] button.
The AV receiver comes on, the display lights up, and the Standby indicator goes off.
Pressing the remote controller’s [On] button again will turn on any components connected via
.
On
To turn the AV receiver off, press the [Standby/On] button, or press the remote controller’s [Standby] button. The AV receiver will enter Standby mode. To prevent any
loud surprises the next time you turn on the AV receiver, turn down the volume before
you turn it off.
Up and Running in a Few Easy Steps
To get your system up and running with the minimum of fuss, here’s a few pointers to help you configure the AV
receiver before you use it for the very first time. These settings only need to be made once.
■ Do the automatic speaker setup—this is essential!
See “Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT)” on page 53.
■ Did you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT or COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or 2?
If you did, see “HDMI Monitor Setup” on page 45.
■ Did you connect a component to an HDMI input,
component video input, or digital audio input?
If you did, see “HDMI Input Setup” on page 46, “Component Video
Input Setup” on page 48, or “Digital Input Setup” on page 50 respectively.
■ Did you connect an Onkyo MD recorder, CD recorder, or RI
Dock?
If you did, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 49.
Y
HDMI
OUT
TAPE
PB
COAXIAL
PR
OPTICAL
IN
MD recorder, CD recorder,
RI Dock
43
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 44 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV receiver for the very first time.
Speaker Settings
Game/TV
3
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
5
6
If you change these 4settings,
you-must run the auto8
9
matic speaker setup 7again
(see
page 53).
Tape
D.TUN
Phono
+10
Enter
CD
Tuner
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
2-1.Speaker Settings
12
Macro
1
2
Speaker Impedance
Speakers Type
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Dock
SAT
u
Men
Men
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
e
tu p
VOL
4
t
Ex i
Retu
Display
Enter
1
2–5
u
+
CH
1, 6
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
rn
Muting
Enter
Rec
Playlist
Random
If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6, set the Speaker Impedance to 4 ohms.
If you’ve connected your front speakers to the FRONT
and SURR BACK terminal posts for bi-amping, you
must change the Speaker Type setting. For hookup information, see “Bi-amping the Front Speakers” on page 23.
5
Notes:
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the volume.
1
Receiver
Se
Enter
Enter
44
Enter
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
6
tu p
2
6ohms
Normal
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
2, 3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Speaker Settings,” and then press [Enter].
The Speaker Settings menu appears.
Se
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Speaker
Impedance,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
4 ohms: Select if the impedance of any
speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6.
6 ohms: Select if the impedances of all
speakers are between 6 and
16 ohms.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Speaker Type,”
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Normal: Select this if you’ve connected your front speakers
normally.
Bi-Amp: Select this if you’ve connected your front speakers for
bi-amped operation.
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
tu p
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 45 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
HDMI Monitor Setup
2
Enter
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press [Enter].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
TV
Input
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
Enter
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
3
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
2, 3
Top
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Men
Men
u
1
Enter
2–5
u
1-1.Monitor Out
+
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
-
1, 6
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
HDMI Monitor
VOL
Retu
rn
Enter
Muting
Playlist
Random
4
Listening Mode
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
Direct
THX
All ST
Enter
If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, set the HDMI Monitor setting to No so that the onscreen setup menus are displayed
and composite video and S-Video sources are upconverted and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT.
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT, set the HDMI
Monitor setting to Yes so that the onscreen setup menus
are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and component video sources are upconverted and output by the
HDMI OUT.
1
Receiver
Se
tu p
Yes
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Display
Rec
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Monitor
Out,” and then press [Enter].
The Monitor Out menu appears.
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “HDMI Monitor,”
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
No: Select this if your TV is connected to the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1,
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2
OUT, S MONITOR OUT, or
V MONITOR OUT.
Yes: Select this if your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT.
Note:
• When Yes is selected, the onscreen
setup menus are output by only the
HDMI OUT. If you’re not using
the HDMI OUT and select Yes by
mistake and the menus disappear,
turn off your components, connect
the AV receiver to your TV with a
composite video or S-Video cable,
and then change this setting back
to No.
45
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 46 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
5
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Monitor Out2,”
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Monitor:Select this if you’ve connected the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV
or other component in your
main room.
Zone 2: Select this if you’ve connected the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV
in Zone 2.
When Monitor is selected, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT outputs the same
video as the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1.
Notes:
• See page 27 for charts showing how the HDMI Monitor setting affects the video signal flow through the AV
receiver.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
HDMI Input Setup
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
2, 3
Top
Men
u
Men
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
VOL
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
rn
Display
Rec
1
2–4
u
+
CH
1, 5
Receiver
Muting
Playlist
Random
Listening Mode
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
Direct
THX
All ST
If you connect a video component to an HDMI IN, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your DVD player to HDMI IN 1, you
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD input selector.
By default, none of the HDMI inputs are assigned. The
following input selectors can be assigned: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,
TAPE, CD, PHONO.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an
HDMI cable, you can set the AV receiver so that composite video, S-Video, and component video sources are
upconverted (*) and output by the HDMI OUT. You can
set this for each input selector by selecting the “- - -”
option.
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
HDMI
IN
(*)
OUT
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
46
HDMI
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 47 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
1
Receiver
Se
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
tu p
2
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press [Enter].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
Notes:
• Each HDMI IN cannot be assigned to more than one
input selector.
• For composite video, S-Video, and component
video upconversion for the HDMI OUT, the HDMI
Monitor setting must be set to Yes (see page 45).
See page 27 for more information on video signal flow
and upconversion.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as
explained here, the digital audio input for that input
selector is automatically set to the same HDMI IN.
See “Digital Input Setup” on page 50.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
Enter
3
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. HDMI Input,”
and then press [Enter].
The HDMI Input menu appears.
1-2.HDMI Input
Enter
4
Enter
Enter
5
Se
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2
-------------
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector, and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 1.
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 2.
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 3.
- - -: Select this to upconvert and
output composite video,
S-Video, and component
video sources from the HDMI
OUT.
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
tu p
47
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 48 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
Component Video Input Setup
1
Receiver
Se
On
Standby
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
tu p
TV
Input
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
2
CD
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Enter
Macro
1
2
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone2
CD
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press [Enter].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
2, 3
Top
Men
u
Men
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
1
2–4
u
+
CH
1, 5
Receiver
Enter
VOL
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
rn
Display
Muting
3
Rec
Playlist
Random
Enter
Listening Mode
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
If you connect a video component to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your DVD player
to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3, you must assign COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3 to the DVD input selector.
By default, the DVD input selector is assigned to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, and all of the other input selectors (i.e., VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1,
AUX 2, TAPE, CD, PHONO) are assigned to the “- - -”
option.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with a
component video cable, you can set the AV receiver so
that composite video and S-Video sources are upconverted (*) and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1 or 2. You can set this for each input
selector by selecting the “- - -” option.
Composite video, S-Video
4
Enter
Enter
(*)
OUT
Composite video, S-Video
48
1-3.Component Video Input
Enter
Component video
IN
Component video
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Component
Video Input,” and then press
[Enter].
The Component Video Input menu
appears.
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2
IN1
-----------
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector, and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1.
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2.
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3.
- - -: Select to output composite
video and S-Video sources
from the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 49 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
tu p
Notes:
• For composite video and S-Video upconversion for
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or
2, the HDMI Monitor setting must be set to No (see
page 45). See page 27 for more information on video
signal flow and upconversion.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
Changing the Input Display
If you connect an
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the GAME/TV jacks, for
to work properly, you must change this setting.
This setting can only be changed on the AV receiver.
1, 2
1
1, 2
Press the [Tape] or [Game/TV]
input selector button so that
“TAPE” or “GAME/TV” appears
on the display.
or
2
or
Press and hold down the [Tape]
or [Game/TV] input selector button (about 3 seconds) to change
the setting.
Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or
DOCK.
For the Tape input selector, the setting
changes in this order:
TAPE → MD → CDR
→
Se
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
DOCK
→
5
For the Game/TV input selector, the
setting changes in this order:
GAME/TV ↔ DOCK
Note:
• DOCK can be selected for the Tape input selector or
Game/TV input selector, but not both at the same time.
49
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 50 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
Digital Input Setup
2
Enter
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press [Enter].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
TV
Input
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
Enter
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
3
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
2, 3
Top
Receiver
Men
u
Men
Enter
-
1, 5
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
1-4.Digital Input
VOL
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
rn
Display
Rec
Enter
2–4
u
+
CH
Disc
Album
1
Muting
Playlist
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Digital
Input,” and then press [Enter].
The Digital Input menu appears.
Enter
Random
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
AUX1
AUX2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
--FRONT
----OPT2
---
Listening Mode
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
Direct
THX
All ST
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your CD player to OPTICAL IN 2, you
must assign OPTICAL IN 2 to the CD input selector.
4
Enter
These are the default assignments.
Input selector
Audio input
DVD
COAX1
VCR/DVR
COAX2
CBL/SAT
COAX3
GAME/TV
OPT1
AUX 1
---
AUX 2
FRONT (Fixed)
TAPE
---
TUNER
---
CD
OPT2
PHONO
---
1
Receiver
Se
50
tu p
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector, and then use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
COAX1: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
COAXIAL IN 1.
COAX2: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
COAXIAL IN 2.
COAX3: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
COAXIAL IN 3.
OPT1: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
OPTICAL IN 1.
OPT2: Select if the component is
connected to DIGITAL
OPTICAL IN 2.
- - -: Select if the component is
connected to an analog
input.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 51 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
5
Se
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
tu p
Notes:
• Only FRONT can be assigned to the AUX 2 input
selector.
• The TUNER input selector cannot be assigned and is
fixed at the “- - -” option.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in
“HDMI Video Setup” on page 46, this input assignment is automatically set to the same HDMI IN. And
in addition to the usual inputs (e.g., COAX1, COAX2,
etc.), you can also select HDMI inputs.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
51
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 52 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
Analog Input Setup
3
Enter
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. Analog
Input,” and then press [Enter].
The Analog Input menu appears.
1-5.Analog Input
TV
Input
Multich
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
-
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
DVD
Enter
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
4
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
TV
Cable
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
2, 3
Top
Men
Men
u
CH
Enter
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
Enter
VOL
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
rn
Display
Rec
1
2–4
u
+
Disc
Album
1, 5
Receiver
Muting
Playlist
Random
5
Se
Listening Mode
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
Direct
THX
All ST
If you connect a component to the AV receiver’s analog
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD
player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to the
DVD input selector.
1
Receiver
Se
tu p
2
Enter
Enter
52
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press [Enter].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector.
You can assign the multichannel input
to the following input selectors: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
AUX 1, AUX 2, TAPE, CD, or
PHONO.
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
tu p
Notes:
• To listen to the component connected to the multichannel input, press the [Audio Selector] button
repeatedly to select Multich (see page 81).
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 53 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
Using Audyssey MultEQ XT
Automatic Speaker Setup
(Audyssey MultEQ XT)
With the supplied speaker setup microphone, Audyssey
MultEQ XT can measure the number of speakers connected, their sizes, crossover frequencies, and distances
from the listening position and calculate the optimal
speaker settings for you automatically.
Before using this function, connect and position all of
your speakers.
Measurement Positions
To create a listening environment in which several
people can enjoy your home theater simultaneously,
Audyssey MultEQ XT takes measurements at up to eight
positions within the listening area.
■ 1st measurement position
This is the center position of your listening area, or
the listening position if there’s only one listener.
■ 2nd–8th measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to eight positions.
The following examples show some typical home theater
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when
prompted.
TV
TV
Notes:
• If any of your speakers is 4 ohms, change the
Speaker Impedance setting before running the
automatic speaker setup (see page 44).
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted
automatically when the automatic speaker setup
starts.
• Automatic speaker setup cannot be performed
while a pair of headphones is connected.
• It takes about 15 minutes to complete the automatic speaker setup for three positions. Total measurement time varies depending on the number of
positions and speakers.
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during the automatic speaker setup, unless you
want to cancel the setup.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
the automatic speaker setup.
1
TV
2, 9
Setup Mic
On
Standby
TV
Input
TV
TV
TV
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
CD
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
TV
TV
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
TV
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Enter
To
Receiver
en
pM
u
Men
,
u
+
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
: Listening area
Gu
id
Se
e
tu p
VOL
t
Ex i
Retu
Display
rn
Muting
: Listening position
Rec
Playlist
Random
53
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 54 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
1
2
Turn on the AV receiver and the
connected TV.
On the TV, select the input to which the
AV receiver is connected.
4
-----SP Detect Result----FL
SL
SBL
C
Enter
AUDYSSEY
: Yes
: Yes
: Yes
: No
FR
SR
SBR
SW
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Next
Retry
Cancel
“Yes” means that the speaker was
detected. “No” means that no speaker
was detected.
Please place microphone at center
of listening area at ear height.
If you agree with the results, use
the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select Next, and then
press [Enter].
The options are:
Push Enter : Next
Notes:
• Make sure the microphone is horizontal.
• If there’s an obstacle between the
microphone and any speaker, the
automatic setup will not work correctly. Set up the room as you would
when enjoying a DVD movie.
• Positioning the microphone close to
where your ears would normally be
will provide the best results. You can
set the height of the microphone by
using a tripod or level table.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Enter
Place the setup microphone at
the 1st measurement position,
and connect it to the Setup Mic
jack.
Auto Speaker Setup
The speaker detect results
appear.
Next: Proceed to the next step.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.
5
The following screen appears.
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
Please place microphone at
2nd Position at ear height.
Push Enter : Next
3
Press [Enter].
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
Place the setup microphone at
the next position (see page 53),
and then press [Enter].
Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more
measurements. This takes a few minutes.
Do not unplug microphone.
Please keep quiet.
Now Measuring...
Auto Speaker Setup
A test tone is output by each speaker in
turn, as Audyssey MultEQ XT determines which speakers are connected.
This takes a few minutes.
Note:
• If any extraneous noise is picked up
by the microphone, the automatic
setup may not work correctly, so
keep quiet.
54
AUDYSSEY
Do not unplug microphone.
Please keep quiet.
Now Measuring...
6
When prompted, place the setup
microphone at the next position,
and repeat step 5.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 55 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
7
After the 3rd or 7th measurement, the
following screen appears.
Enter
Auto Speaker Setup
Review SP Distance: Review the
speaker distance settings (see
“Reviewing the Results” on
page 57).
Review SP Level: Review the speaker
level settings (see “Reviewing
the Results” on page 57).
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
setup.
AUDYSSEY
Please select “Next”, when measuring
next position, and select “finish”,
when ending.
Next
finish(Calculate)
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an option, and
then press [Enter].
Next: Select this if you want to measure another listening position. After the 8th
measurement has been taken,
the procedure automatically
proceeds to step 8.
Finish (Calculate): Select this if you
don’t want to measure any
more listening positions and
are ready to calculate the
results, then go to step 8.
10
If you selected “Save,” the results are
saved, and the following screen
appears.
Auto Speaker Setup
Saving...
11
Disconnect the setup microphone.
Auto Speaker Setup
8
When the measurements are
complete, the following screen
appears.
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
AUDYSSEY
Please unplug microphone.
AUDYSSEY
Calculating...
9
When the calculations are complete, the following screen
appears.
Notes:
• When the automatic speaker setup is complete, the
Equalizer Settings (page 101) will be set to Audyssey.
• You can cancel the automatic speaker setup at any
point in the procedure simply by disconnecting the
setup microphone.
Enter
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
Enter
Error Messages
During the automatic speaker setup, one of the following
error messages may appear:
Ambient noise is too high
Auto Speaker Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an option, and
then press [Enter].
Save: Save the calculated settings
and exit the automatic
speaker setup.
Review SP Config: Review the
speaker configuration settings
(see “Reviewing the Results”
on page 57).
AUDYSSEY
Ambient noise is too high.
Retry
Cancel
This message appears if there’s too much background
noise and the measurements cannot be performed properly. Remove the source of the noise and try again, or
cancel the automatic speaker setup.
55
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 56 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
Speaker Detect Error
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
-----Speaker Detect Error----FL
SL
SBL
C
: Yes
: Yes
: Yes
: No
FR
SR
SBR
SW
:
:
:
:
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FL
SL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
Error
Yes
Yes
Yes
FR
SR
SBR
SW
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Retry
Cancel
Retry
Cancel
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no
speaker was detected. Check your speaker connections
and retry, or cancel the automatic speaker setup.
There is a problem with a speaker. The speaker may be
broken.
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
Speaker Detect Error
-----Speaker Detect Error----FL
SL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
Yes
----Yes
FR
SR
SBR
SW
: No
: --: --: ---
Retry
Cancel
A different number of speakers has been detected.
Retry
Cancel
Writing Error
One of the front speakers has not been detected.
Auto Speaker Setup
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
Writing Error!
-----Speaker Detect Error----FL
SL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
Yes
----Yes
FR
SR
SBR
SW
: Yes
: No
: --: ---
Retry
Cancel
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error----:
:
:
:
Yes
----Yes
FR
SR
SBR
SW
: Yes
: No
: Yes
: ---
Retry
Cancel
The surround back speakers have been detected but the
surround speakers haven’t.
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup
-----Speaker Detect Error----FL
SL
SBL
C
: Yes
: --: No
: Yes
FR
SR
SBR
SW
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Retry
Cancel
The right surround back speaker has been detected but
the left surround back speaker hasn’t.
56
Retry
Cancel
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again, or
cancel the automatic speaker setup.
One of the surround speakers has not been detected.
FL
SL
SBL
C
AUDYSSEY
If this message appears repeatedly, the AV receiver may
be malfunctioning and you should contact the dealer
from whom you purchased this unit.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 57 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
Changing the Speaker Settings Manually
Reviewing the Results
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select the settings that
you want to review, and then
press [Enter].
Auto Speaker Setup
Enter
AUDYSSEY
Save
Review SP Config
Review SP Distance
Review SP Level
Cancel
The options are:
Review SP Config
Review the speaker configuration
settings.
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
Review SP Config
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Full Band
80Hz
100Hz
150Hz
2ch
Review SP Distance
Review the speaker distance settings.
Auto Speaker Setup
In some cases, the measurements taken by the automatic
speaker setup may not provide usable results. If running
the speaker setup a second time doesn’t help, you’ll have
to set the speaker settings manually (see pages 96–101).
Notes:
• For THX-certified speakers, the 80 Hz (THX) crossover frequency is recommended. If you use the automatic speaker setup, you’ll need to manually select
80 Hz (THX) for each THX-certified speaker (see
page 96).
• Because of the complexities of low-frequency sounds
and the way they interact with a room, THX recommends setting the subwoofer level and distance manually.
Using a Powered Subwoofer
If you’re using a powered subwoofer, as it outputs very
low-frequency sound and its position is usually low
down, it may not be detected by the automatic speaker
setup. In this case, increase the subwoofer’s volume,
select its highest crossover frequency, and then try running the automatic speaker setup again. Note that if the
volume is set too high and the sound distorts, it may not
be detected, so use an appropriate volume level. If the
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or
Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for
details.
AUDYSSEY
Review SP Distance
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
15ft
15ft
15ft
7ft
7ft
7ft
7ft
15ft
Review SP Level
Review the speaker level settings.
Auto Speaker Setup
AUDYSSEY
Review SP Level
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
+12dB
0dB
–12dB
+3dB
+4dB
-6dB
-3dB
0dB
Press [Return] to return to the previous
screen.
57
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 58 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
TV Format Setup
(not North American models)
3
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. OSD Setup,”
and then press [Enter].
The OSD Setup menu appears.
6-2.OSD Setup
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
TV
Input
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
4
Macro
1
2
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
Top
Men
Men
u
CH
Enter
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
Enter
VOL
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
rn
Display
Rec
1
2–4
u
+
Disc
Album
1, 5
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
2, 3
On
4:3
Bottom
Auto
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
Enter
Immidiate Display
Monitor Type
Display Position
TV Format
Muting
Playlist
Enter
Random
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “TV Format,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Auto: Select this to have the AV
receiver automatically detect
the TV system from the video
input signals.
NTSC: Select if the TV system in
your area is NTSC.
PAL: Select if the TV system in
your area is PAL.
Listening Mode
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
Direct
THX
All ST
For the onscreen setup menus to display properly, you
must specify the TV system used in your area.
1
Receiver
Se
tu p
2
Enter
Enter
58
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “6. Miscellaneous,” and then press [Enter].
The Miscellaneous menu appears.
5
Se
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
tu p
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 59 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
First Time Setup—Continued
AM Frequency Step Setup
(on some models)
3
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Tuner,” and
then press [Enter].
The Tuner menu appears.
7-3.Tuner
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
AM Freq Step
TV
9kHz
Input
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
CD
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
Enter
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
4
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
2, 3
Top
Men
Men
u
CH
Enter
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
Enter
VOL
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
rn
Display
Rec
1
2–4
u
+
Disc
Album
1, 5
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Muting
Playlist
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “AM Freq.
Step,” and then use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
10 kHz: Select if 10 kHz steps are
used in your area.
9 kHz: Select if 9 kHz steps are used
in your area.
Enter
Random
Listening Mode
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
Direct
THX
All ST
For AM tuning to work properly, you must specify the
AM frequency step used in your area. Note that when
this setting is changed, all radio presets are deleted.
1
Receiver
Se
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
5
Se
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
tu p
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
tu p
2
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
Enter
59
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 60 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Playing Your AV Components
Basic AV Receiver Operation
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
TV
Input
3
1
CD
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
1
u
Men
Men
1
u
+
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
Display
1
Receiver
Gu
id
Se
tu p
e
VOL
3
t
Ex i
Retu
rn
Muting
Use the AV receiver’s input selector buttons to select an input source.
AV receiver
Remote
controller
To select an input source with the remote controller, press its [Receiver]
Remote Mode button, and then use its Input Selector buttons.
Receiver
DVD
VCR/DVR
1
2
3
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
CBL/SAT
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
Phono
+10
2
Start playback on the source component.
To watch a DVD or other video source, on your TV, select the video input that’s connected to the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1, COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, HDMI OUT, or MONITOR OUT.
On some DVD players, you may need to change the digital or HDMI audio output
settings.
3
AV receiver
Remote
controller
VOL
4
60
To adjust the volume, use the Master Volume control or the remote controller’s [VOL] button.
Since the AV receiver is designed for home theaters, it has a wide volume range for
precise adjustment. The volume can be set to –∞ dB, –81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through
+18.0 dB.
Select a listening mode and enjoy!
See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 82.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 61 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio
■ Manual Tuning Mode
Listening to AM/FM Stations
Tuning Mode
Tuning
1
Press the [Tuning Mode] button
so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the display.
2
Press and hold the Tuning Up or
Down [ ]/[ ] button.
The frequency stops changing when
you release the button.
Press the button repeatedly to change
the frequency one step at a time.
Tuner
With the built-in tuner, you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations and store your favorite stations as presets for
easy selection.
Use the [Tuner] input selector
button to select AM or FM.
In this example, FM has been selected.
Band
Frequency
The North American model changes FM frequency in
0.2 MHz steps, 10 kHz steps for AM. For other models
it’s 0.05 MHz steps for FM and 9 kHz steps for AM.
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Tuning into Weak FM Stereo Stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.
(Actual display depends on country.)
Tuning into AM/FM Radio Stations
■ Auto Tuning Mode
1
Press the [Tuning Mode] button
so that the AUTO indicator
appears on the display.
2
Press the Tuning Up or Down
[ ]/[ ] button.
Searching stops when a station is
found.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM
STEREO indicator also appears.
TUNED
AUTO
FM STEREO
61
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 62 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
■ Tuning into Stations by Frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by entering the appropriate frequency.
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
Displaying AM/FM Radio Information
Display
TV
Input
Number
buttons
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
CD
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
TV VOL
D.TUN
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
Press the [Display] button to display the available information.
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
TV
Cable
Dock
SAT
Top
1
Men
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
u
Men
Receiver
u
Press the [Receiver] button, followed by the [D.TUN] button.
The [Receiver] button flashes.
Receiver
Clear
(Actual display depends on country.)
2
DVD
VCR/DVR
1
2
3
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
CBL/SAT
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),
press 8, 7, 5.
Phono
62
0
Frequency
Preset #
Listening mode
D.TUN
+10
Band
Note:
While the [Receiver] button is flashing,
you cannot select another input source
with the remote controller.
Note:
• When you select a preset with a custom name (see
page 104), its name is displayed instead of the band
and frequency.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 63 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Using RDS (not North American
model)
RDS only works in areas where RDS broadcasts are
available. When tuned to an RDS station, the RDS indicator appears.
RDS indicator
RDS Program Types (PTY)
Type
Display
None
NONE
News reports
NEWS
Current affairs
AFFAIRS
Information
INFO
Sport
SPORT
Education
EDUCATE
■ What is RDS?
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed
by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is available in most European countries. Many FM stations use
it these days. In addition to displaying text information,
RDS can also help you find radio stations by type (e.g.,
news, sport, rock, etc.).
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS information:
Drama
DRAMA
Culture
CULTURE
Science and technology
SCIENCE
Varied
VARIED
Pop music
POP M
Rock music
ROCK M
Middle of the road music
EASY M
Light classics
LIGHT M
Serious classics
CLASSICS
PS (Program Service)
Other music
OTHER M
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Pressing the [Display] button will display the frequency for 3
seconds.
Weather
WEATHER
Finance
FINANCE
Children’s programmes
CHILDREN
Social affairs
SOCIAL
RT (Radio Text)
Religion
RELIGION
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text will be shown on the display (see
page 64).
Phone in
PHONE IN
PTY (Program Type)
Jazz music
JAZZ
Country music
COUNTRY
National music
NATION M
Oldies music
OLDIES
This allows you to search RDS radio stations by type
(see page 64).
TP (Traffic Program)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
broadcast traffic information (see page 64).
Notes:
• In some cases, the characters displayed on the AV
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be displayed when unsupported characters are received.
This is not a malfunction.
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data
may be displayed intermittently or not at all.
Travel
TRAVEL
Leisure
LEISURE
Folk music
FOLK M
Documentary
DOCUMENT
Alarm test
TEST
Alarm
ALARM
63
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 64 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Displaying Radio Text (RT)
4
To start the search, press [Enter].
The AV receiver searches until it finds a
station of the type you specified, at
which point it stops briefly before continuing with the search.
5
When a station you want to listen
to is found, press [Enter].
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
RT/PTY/TP
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text
information, the text can be displayed.
Listening to Traffic News (TP)
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
once.
The RT information scrolls across the
display.
2
3
Notes:
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV
receiver waits for the RT information.
• If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display,
no RT information is available.
1
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
2
1
3
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.
1
Use the [Tuner] input selector
button to select FM.
2
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
three times.
If the current radio station is broadcasting TP (Traffic Program), “[TP]” will
appear on the display and traffic news
will be heard as and when it’s broadcast. If “TP” without square brackets
appears, this means that the station is
not broadcasting TP.
3
To locate a station that is broadcasting TP, press [Enter].
The AV receiver searches until it finds a
station that’s broadcasting TP.
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
4, 5
You can search for radio stations by type.
1
64
Use the [Tuner] input selector
button to select FM.
2
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
twice.
The current program type appears on
the display.
3
Use the Preset [ ]/[ ] buttons
to select the type of program you
want.
See the table on page 63.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 65 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Listening to XM Satellite Radio®
(North American Model Only)
Important XM Radio Information
XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of
commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news,
talk and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior
digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for
every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its passion for
live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute
news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and
much more. For U.S. customers, information about
XM Satellite Radio is available online at www.xmradio.com. For Canadian customers, information about
XM Canada is online at
www.xmradio.ca.
Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner and Home
Dock
To receive XM Satellite Radio, you need an XM MiniTuner and Home Dock, which includes a home antenna.
These are sold separately. For connection information,
refer to the instruction manual supplied with the XM
Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.
XM Mini-Tuner jack
XM
XM
SIRIUS
0
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
Note:
Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only.
All fees and programming subject to change. Channels
with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL.
Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by
calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and
1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents).
For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels
and advertising-supported channels, visit
lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or xmradio.ca
(Canadian residents).
Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available
at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Only available in the 48 contiguous
United States and Canada. ©2007 XM Satellite Radio
Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.
A warning against reverse engineering:
It is prohibited to, and you agree that you will not, copy,
decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise access and/or make available any
technology incorporated in receivers compatible with
the XM Satellite Radio system. Furthermore, the
AMBE® voice compression software included in this
product is protected by intellectual property rights
including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of
Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The software is licensed
solely for use within this product. The user of this or any
other software contained in an XM Radio is explicitly
prohibited from attempting to copy, decompile, reverse
engineer, hack, manipulate or disassemble the object
code, or in any other way convert the object code into
human-readable form.
1
2
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
Receiver
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
Men
u
Men
u
+
Enter
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
-
Setup
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
e
tu p
VOL
t
Ex i
Retu
rn
Display
Rec
Receiver
Muting
Playlist
Random
Setting the Satellite Radio Mode
Before you can listen to XM Satellite Radio, you must
set the Satellite Radio mode to XM.
1
Receiver
Se
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
tu p
2
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
7.Hardware Setup
Enter
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
65
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 66 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
3
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Tuner,” and
then press [Enter].
The Tuner screen appears.
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
TV
Input
Number
buttons
7-3.Tuner
Satellite Radio
On
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
None
Tuner
Enter
CBL/SAT
CD
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
D.TUN
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
4
Enter
Enter
5
Se
tu p
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “XM.”
If there are 2 items on the Tuner
screen, use Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Satellite
Radio.”
Pressing the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons cycles through the following
options: None → XM → SIRIUS →
XM/SIRIUS
None: Select if you’re not using
satellite radio.
XM: Select to use XM Satellite
Radio.
SIRIUS: Select to use SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
XM/SIRIUS:Select to use XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
SAT
Top
Tuning
/
Men
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
u
Men
Enter
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
Display
Receiver
u
+
Gu
id
Se
tu p
e
VOL
t
Ex i
Retu
rn
Muting
Selecting XM Satellite Radio
AV receiver
Remote
controller
Receiver
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
Setup closes.
Enter
Dock
Tuner
On the AV receiver, press the
[Tuner] Input Selector button
repeatedly to select XM.
On the remote controller, press
the [Receiver] Remote Mode button, and then press the [Tuner]
Input Selector button repeatedly
to select XM.
If “CHECK XM TUNER” appears on
the display, make sure the XM MiniTuner is connected properly.
Signing Up for XM Satellite Radio
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner and Home
Dock, you are ready to subscribe to XM Satellite Radio.
You’ll need a major credit card and your XM Radio ID.
There are three places you can find your 8-character XM
Radio ID:
1. On the XM Mini-Tuner
2. On the XM Mini-Tuner packaging
3. On XM Channel 0, as explained below
Tuner
Setup
1
Use the Tuning Up and Down
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select RADIO
ID.
Your XM Radio ID number is displayed. Write it below for reference.
ID
66
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 67 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
2
To sign up, go to:
http://activate.xmradio.com
Or call: 1-800-967-2346
For XM Canada, go to:
http://xmradio.ca
Or call: 1-877-438-9677
■ Category Search Mode
1
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, and then press the
[Enter] button repeatedly to
select Category Search mode.
Receiver
Enter
Notes:
• RADIO ID cannot be selected in Category Search
mode. You must select Channel Search mode (see
right column).
• The following letters are not used in XM Satellite
Radio IDs: I, O, S, F.
• XM Satellite Radio will transmit a special signal to
your AV receiver to activate the full channel lineup.
Activation normally takes between 10 and 15 minutes,
but during busy peak periods, you may need to leave
the AV receiver turned on for up to an hour.
Selecting XM Radio Channels
There are three ways to select XM radio channels:
1. Channel Search mode: select any channel.
2. Category Search mode: select channels by category.
3. Direct tuning: enter channel number.
2
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a category, and
use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a channel in
that category.
Enter
■ Direct Tuning
You can select an XM radio channel directly by entering
its number.
1
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[D.TUN] button.
The [Receiver] button flashes.
Receiver
Note:
You can’t select Channel Search mode or Category
Search mode while the Tuning Arrow
indicators
are flashing, as tuning is in progress.
D.TUN
Clear
■ Channel Search Mode
1
Receiver
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, and then press the
[ENTER] button repeatedly to
select Channel Search mode.
2
DVD
VCR/DVR
1
2
3
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
D.TUN
Enter
0
Clear
11
2
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a channel.
Enter
CBL/SAT
Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the channel
number.
For example, to select channel #20,
press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [Enter].
12
Note:
While the [Receiver] button is flashing,
you cannot select another input source
with the remote controller.
Channel number
Channel name
You can also use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a category.
67
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 68 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Tuning
Memory
Enter
/
Return
Displaying XM Radio Information
AV receiver
Press the [Display] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.
Remote
controller
Display
Tuning Mode
The following information can be displayed:
Display
1
2
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Channel number & preset number
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
Receiver
Men
u
Men
CH + / –
Enter
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
-
Display
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
e
tu p
VOL
t
Ex i
Retu
Return
rn
Display
Rec
Receiver
u
+
Muting
Playlist
Random
Selecting Channels on the AV receiver:
1
Press the [Tuning Mode] button
repeatedly to select Channel
Search mode or Category Search
mode.
2
↓
Category → Artist → Song title → Listening mode
Notes:
• If the category, artist, or song title is not available,
“- - -” will be displayed instead.
• The listening mode is not displayed when Zone 2 or
Zone 3 is selected.
Positioning the XM Mini-Tuner System
You can check the signal strength of the XM radio signal
and adjust the position of the XM Mini-Tuner system
accordingly.
1
Press [Enter] repeatedly to select
a category.
3
Use the Tuning Up and Down [ ]/
[ ] buttons to select a channel.
In Channel Search mode, you can
select any channel.
In Category Search mode, you can only
select channels from the currently
selected category.
Selecting the Previous Channel:
AV receiver
Remote
controller
Retu
68
Channel name
↓
Zone3
3
rn
To listen to the previously
selected XM channel, press the
[Return] button.
Receiver
Se
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
tu p
2
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Source Setup menu appears.
4.Source Setup
Enter
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Note:
• If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None (see page 66), the “4. Satellite
Radio” item is not available.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 69 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
3
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Satellite
Radio,” and then press [Enter].
The Satellite Radio screen appears.
The name of the currently selected
input selector is displayed in a box.
Enter
4
Position the XM Mini-Tuner
Antenna so that as many bars as
possible (up to 3) appear on the
XM Satellite signal strength
meter.
The best signal is achieved when the
antenna is pointing to the southern sky
through an unobstructed window.
4-4.SAT Radio
XM Antenna Aiming
Satellite
Terrestrial
If you cannot receive a satellite signal,
position the XM Mini-Tuner System so
that as many bars as possible (up to 3)
appear on the XM Terrestrial signal
strength meter.
Notes:
• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy
XM Radio by using either satellite or terrestrial reception.
• Terrestrial signals are only available in certain areas.
• The XM information is only displayed when the Satellite Radio mode is set to XM or XM/SIRIUS (see
page 66).
• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS
Satellite Radio and the Satellite mode is set to
XM/SIRIUS (see page 66), signal strength meters for
both systems appear on the same screen.
XM Radio Messages
The following messages may appear while using XM
Satellite radio.
❑ CHECK ANTENNA
The XM antenna is not properly connected to the
Mini-Tuner Dock. Check the connection. Check the
antenna cable for damage.
❑ UPDATING
XM is updating your Mini-Tuner with the latest
encryption code. Wait a few seconds until the update
is done. Alternatively, you may be attempting to tune
to a channel that is blocked or that you cannot
receive with your subscription package. To receive
that channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.
❑ NO SIGNAL
The XM Mini-Tuner cannot receive the satellite signal. Check the XM antenna for obstructions to the
southern sky. Check the antenna positioning with the
Antenna Aiming function (see left column).
❑ LOADING
The AV receiver is tuning or decoding audio or text
data. Please wait. If this occurs often, check the XM
antenna position with the Antenna Aiming function
(see left column).
❑ OFF AIR
The XM channel you selected is not currently broadcasting. Select another channel.
❑ UPGRADE XM TUNER
The connected XM CNP-1000 is incompatible. The
AV receiver features advanced technology that is
designed for use with the XM Mini-Tuner. Contact
XM Listener Care and ask about upgrading your XM
CNP-1000 to an XM Mini-Tuner. Have the AV
receiver’s model name and CNP-1000 XM ID number ready beforehand, and explain that your AV
receiver is displaying the message “Upgrade XM
Tuner.” If you already have an XM Mini-Tuner connected and you see this message, turn off the AV
receiver, make sure the XM Mini-Tuner is properly
seated in the Mini-Tuner Dock, and then turn the AV
receiver back on again. If the message reappears,
contact XM Listener Care and explain the issue that
you’re experiencing and the corrective actions
you’ve tried.
❑ CHECK XM TUNER
The AV receiver is having difficulty communicating
with the XM Mini-Tuner module. Make sure the XM
Mini-Tuner is properly seated in the Mini-Tuner
Dock. And make sure the Mini-Tuner Dock cable is
properly connected to the AV receiver and is not
damaged. If the issue persists, contact XM Listener
Care. Have the AV receiver’s model name ready
beforehand, and explain the issue that you’re experiencing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.
❑ Unavailable Channel
You may be attempting to select a channel that is
unavailable or has changed to a different channel
number. Check xmradio.com for the latest channel
listing.
69
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 70 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio®
(North American Models Only)
Important SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
SIRIUS is available in the US for subscribers with
addresses in the continental US and is available in
Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. To
Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and
compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold
separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete
and up-to-date channel lineup and information.
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related
marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
Note:
Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold
separately. Installation costs and other fees and taxes,
including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming
subject to change.
What is SIRIUS Satellite Radio?
Simply The Best Radio on RadioTM with all your favorite entertainment including 100% commercial-free
music, plus superior sports coverage, uncensored talk
and comedy, world-class entertainment, news, weather
and more for your car, home or office. For more information visit sirius.com or siriuscanada.ca
A warning against reverse engineering:
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse
engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated in
receivers compatible with the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
system.
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog
logo are registered trademarks of
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
Indoor/outdoor antenna
with 21-foot cable
SiriusConnect
receiver
AC power
8-pin mini DIN
connector cable
SIRIUS
SIRIUS
jack
XM
SIRIUS
AV receiver
To use the included antenna indoors, you must place it at
a north-, west-, or east-facing window, depending on
where you live. If this isn’t possible, you’ll need to
install it outside, away from any overhead obstructions.
Positioning the Antenna
For a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be
positioned correctly. Use the following map to determine
which area you are in and position the antenna accordingly.
SKY
NORTH
WEST
1
4
5
EAST
3
2
HORIZON
SOUTH
Setting Up the SiriusConnect™ Home
Tuner
The optional SiriusConnect Home tuner kit includes
everything for easy home installation, including the SiriusConnect receiver, indoor/outdoor antenna with 21foot cable, 8-pin mini DIN connector cable, and an AC
power adapter. See the SiriusConnect Home tuner’s
instructions for more information.
Use the 8-pin mini DIN connector cable to connect the
SiriusConnect receiver to the SIRIUS jack on the rear of
the AV receiver.
70
Area 1: Point the antenna toward the sky in the east,
northeast, or southeast, either through a window or outside.
Area 2: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or
northeast, either through a window or outside.
Area 3: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or
northwest, either through a window or outside.
Area 4: Point the antenna toward the sky in the west,
northwest, or southwest, either through a window or
outside.
Area 5: Put the antenna outside and point it straight up.
The antenna cannot be used indoors.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 71 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Tuning
Enter
/
3
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Tuner,” and
then press [Enter].
The Tuner screen appears.
7-3.Tuner
Satellite Radio
None
Enter
Tuner
Setup
4
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
TV
Input
D.TUN
Phono
Tuner
+10
0
Enter
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
Zone3
3
Enter
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
Receiver
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
Men
u
Men
u
+
Enter
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
-
Setup
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
e
tu p
VOL
t
Ex i
Retu
rn
Display
Rec
Receiver
Muting
Playlist
Random
Setting the Satellite Radio Mode
Before you can listen to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you
must set the Satellite Radio mode to SIRIUS.
1
Receiver
Se
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Enter
5
Se
tu p
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
Setup closes.
Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio
AV receiver
tu p
2
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “SIRIUS.”
If there are 2 items on the Tuner
screen, use Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Satellite
Radio.”
Pressing the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons cycles through the following
options: None → XM → SIRIUS →
XM/SIRIUS
None: Select if you’re not using
satellite radio.
XM: Select to use XM Satellite
Radio.
SIRIUS: Select to use SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
XM/SIRIUS:Select to use XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
Remote
controller
Receiver
On the AV receiver, press the
[Tuner] Input Selector button
repeatedly to select SIRIUS.
On the remote controller, press
the [Receiver] Remote Mode button, and then press the [Tuner]
Input Selector button repeatedly
to select SIRIUS.
7.Hardware Setup
Enter
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
Tuner
If “CHECK SR TUNER” appears on
the display, make sure the SiriusConnect receiver is connected properly. If
“ANTENNA ERROR” appears, make
sure the antenna is connected properly.
71
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 72 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Signing Up for SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Before you can use SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you must
first sign up for an account. You’ll need a major credit
card and your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID, which you can
get from the AV receiver, as explained below, or from the
SiriusConnect Home tuner package.
■ Channel Search Mode
1
Receiver
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, and then press the
[Enter] button repeatedly to
select Channel Search mode.
Enter
1
Use the TUNING Up and Down
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select
channel 0.
Your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID number is displayed. Write it below.
2
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a channel.
Channel number
Enter
ID
2
To sign up, go to:
http://activate.siriusradio.com
Or call: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474)
Note:
• Your ID is also displayed on the Satellite Radio
screen. See “Positioning the SiriusConnect Home
Antenna” on page 76.
Channel name
You can also use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a category.
■ Category Search Mode
1
Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio Channels
There are three ways to select SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channels:
1. Channel Search mode: select any channel.
2. Category Search mode: select channels by category.
3. Direct tuning: enter channel number.
On
Receiver
Enter
2
Enter
Standby
TV
Input
Number
buttons
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a category, and
use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a channel in
that category.
CD
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, and then press the
[Enter] button repeatedly to
select Category Search mode.
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
D.TUN
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
TV
Cable
Dock
SAT
Top
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Men
u
Men
1
u
+
Enter
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
Receiver
Gu
id
Se
e
tu p
■ Direct Tuning
You can select a SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel directly
by entering its number.
VOL
Receiver
t
Ex i
Retu
Display
rn
Muting
D.TUN
Clear
Rec
Playlist
Listening Mode
72
Random
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[D.TUN] button.
The [Receiver] button flashes.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 73 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
2
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the channel
number.
For example, to select channel #20,
press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [Enter].
0
Clear
11
12
With SIRIUS Parental Lock, you can lock out channels
that you do not want to receive and use a 4-digit PIN
number to prevent others from unlocking them.
1
9
D.TUN
Parental Lock
Note:
While the [Receiver] button is flashing,
you cannot select another input source
with the remote controller.
Notes:
• If you select an unavailable channel, “INVALID
CHANNEL” appears on the display.
• If you select a channel that you are not subscribed to,
“CALL SIRIUS” appears on the display.
• Channels that are locked must be unlocked before you
can listen to them. See “Parental Lock” on right column for more information.
Receiver
Se
tu p
2
Enter
Enter
Press the [Tuning Mode] button
repeatedly to select Channel
Search mode or Category Search
mode.
2
3
Use the Tuning Up and Down
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a channel.
In Channel Search mode, you can
select any channel.
In Category Search mode, you can only
select channels from the currently
selected category.
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Note:
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None or XM (see page 71), the “5. SIRIUS Parental Lock” item is not available.
Press [Enter] repeatedly to select
a category.
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Source Setup menu appears.
4.Source Setup
Selecting Channels on the AV receiver:
1
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. SIRIUS
Parental Lock,” and then press
[Enter].
The SIRIUS Parental Lock screen
appears.
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Enter
Enter Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Selecting the Previous Channel:
AV receiver
To listen to the previously
selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channel, press the [Return] button.
Remote
controller
rn
Retu
73
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 74 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
4
Press the [D.TUN] button, and
then use the number buttons to
enter the 4-digit PIN number.
D.TUN
8
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
Se
tu p
Clear
Or
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
D.TUN
0
Clear
11
12
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [Enter].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the PIN number.
If you’re entering the PIN number for
the very first time, the PIN is stored,
and the following screen appears.
Notes:
• While a channel is locked, it cannot be selected for
listening.
• To unlock a channel, you must enter the correct PIN
number and change it to Unlocked in step 6.
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
or
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
TV
Input
Edit Code
Parental Lock
Number
buttons
Enter
CD
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
D.TUN
12
Macro
Enter
5
Enter
If you’ve already set a PIN number, you
must enter the correct PIN to get to this
screen. If you enter the wrong PIN, the
message “Wrong Code!” appears and
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.
1
2
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
Receiver
u
Men
Men
u
+
Enter
CH
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Parental Lock,”
and then press [Enter].
The Parental Lock screen appears.
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
Receiver
Gu
id
Se
tu p
e
VOL
t
Ex i
Retu
rn
Display
Muting
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Changing the PIN Number
Parental Lock
Enter
Channel
0ch
:CHANNEL
:STATUS
6
Enter
7
Enter
74
Status
wwwwwwwww
Locked
ENT :SAVE
RET :RETURN
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a channel, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select Locked or
Unlocked.
The number, name, and status of the
currently selected channel is displayed.
When you’ve finished, press
[Enter] to save your changes, or
press [Return] to return to the
previous screen without saving.
When [Enter] is pressed, the confirmation message “Locked” or “Unlocked”
appears.
1
Receiver
Se
tu p
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 75 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
2
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Source Setup menu appears.
Enter
5
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Edit Code,”
and then press [Enter].
The New Code screen appears.
Enter
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Enter
New Code
Enter
0
Note:
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None or XM (see page 71), the “5. SIRIUS Parental Lock” item is not available.
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. SIRIUS
Parental Lock,” and then press
[Enter].
The SIRIUS Parental Lock screen
appears.
Enter
6
Clear
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
D.TUN
Clear
11
4
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
2
3
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
D.TUN
0
Clear
11
12
8
9
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [Enter].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the old PIN number.
If you enter the correct PIN number, the
following screen appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
Confirm the new PIN number by
entering it again.
If you confirm the PIN number correctly, the new PIN is saved and the
message “Complete” appears.
If you confirm the PIN number incorrectly, “Wrong Code!” appears, and
you’ll be returned to step 5 to try again.
8
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
Or
1
7
Comfirm
0
Clear
DVD
6
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Press the [D.TUN] button, and
then use the number buttons to
enter the old 4-digit PIN number.
D.TUN
5
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a number on the
screen, and then press [Enter].
Repeat this for each of the four
digits in the new PIN number.
The Confirm screen appears.
Enter
2
4
Or
Enter Code
1
3
or
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Enter
0
2
Press the [D.TUN] button, and
then use the number buttons to
enter the new 4-digit PIN number.
D.TUN
0
1
Se
tu p
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
or
Edit Code
Parental Lock
Enter
If you enter the wrong PIN number, the
message “Wrong Code!” appears and
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.
Enter
75
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 76 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Tuning
Enter
/
Positioning the SiriusConnect Home
Antenna
You can check the strength of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
signal and adjust the position of the SiriusConnect Home
antenna accordingly.
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
TV
Input
Tuner
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
TV VOL
1
Receiver
Setup
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
Se
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Tuner] button, and [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
tu p
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
TV
Cable
Dock
SAT
Top
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Men
u
Men
u
+
Enter
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
Display
Receiver
Gu
id
Se
e
tu p
2
VOL
t
Ex i
Retu
Display
Enter
rn
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Source Setup menu appears.
Muting
4.Source Setup
Rec
Playlist
Random
Enter
Listening Mode
Stereo
Surround
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Displaying SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Information
AV receiver
Note:
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to
None (see page 71), the “4. Satellite
Radio” item is not available.
Press the [Display] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.
Remote
controller
3
Enter
Display
The following information can be displayed:
Channel name
↓
Channel number & preset number
↓
Category
↓
Artist/composer
↓
Song title
↓
Listening mode
Notes:
• If the category, artist/composer, or song title is not
available, “- - -” will be displayed instead.
76
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Satellite
Radio,” and then press [Enter].
The Satellite Radio screen appears.
The name of the currently selected
input selector is displayed in a box.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 77 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
4
Position the SiriusConnect Home
antenna so that as many bars as
possible (up to 3) appear on the
SIRIUS Satellite signal strength
meter.
4-4.SAT Radio
SIRIUS Antenna Aiming
Satellite
SIRIUS ID
Terrestrial
000000000000
If you cannot receive a satellite signal,
position the SiriusConnect Home
antenna so that as many bars as possible
(up to 3) appear on the SIRIUS Terrestrial signal strength meter.
Notes:
• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy
SIRIUS Satellite Radio by using either satellite or terrestrial reception.
• Terrestrial signals are only available in certain areas.
• The SIRIUS information on the Satellite Radio screen
is only displayed when the Satellite Radio mode is set
to SIRIUS or XM/SIRIUS (see page 71).
• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS
Satellite Radio and the Satellite mode is set to
XM/SIRIUS (see page 71), signal strength meters for
both systems appear on the same screen.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Messages
The following messages may appear while using
SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
❑ ACQUIRING
The SiriusConnect receiver is acquiring the signal or
no signal is present. Make sure the SiriusConnect
Home tuner is connected properly and that there are
no obstacles close by.
❑ ANTENNA ERROR
Make sure the SiriusConnect Home tuner is connected properly.
❑ SUB UPDATED
Displayed while your subscription is being updated.
No operations can be performed until this message
has cleared.
❑ UPDATING XXX%
Displayed while the channel map is being updated.
Wait until the updating is complete.
❑ UPDATING
Displayed while the SiriusConnect receiver’s firmware is being updated.
❑ INVALID CHANNEL
Displayed if you select an unavailable channel.
❑ CALL SIRIUS
Displayed when you select a channel to which you
are not subscribed. Call SIRIUS if you want to subscribe.
❑ CHECK SR TUNER
Displayed if the SiriusConnect receiver is not connected. Make sure the SiriusConnect receiver is connected properly, and make sure its AC adapter is
plugged in.
77
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 78 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Listening to the Radio—Continued
Presetting AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS
Stations
Selecting Presets
Preset
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
TV
Input
2, 4
3
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
-
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS radio stations.
1
Press the [Memory] button.
The preset number flashes.
3
While the preset number is flashing (about 8 seconds), use the
Preset [ ]/[ ] buttons to select
a preset from 1 through 40.
4
Press the [Memory] button again
to store the station.
The station is stored and the preset
number stops flashing.
Repeat this procedure for all of your
favorite stations.
Men
u
u
+
CH +/–
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
-
Tune into the AM, FM, XM, or SIRIUS station you want to store as a
preset.
2
Men
Receiver
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
tu p
e
VOL
t
Ex i
Retu
Display
rn
Muting
To select a preset, use the Preset
[ ]/[ ] buttons or the remote
controller’s CH [+/–] button.
+
CH
Disc
Album
-
Deleting Presets
2
Note:
• You can name your radio presets for easy identification (see page 104).
78
1
Select the preset that you want to
delete.
See the previous section.
2
While holding down the [Memory] button, press the
[Tuning Mode] button.
The preset is deleted and its number
disappears from the display.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 79 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Common Functions
This section explains functions that can be used with any
input source.
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
-
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
+10
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
M
Top
Press
[Receiver]
first
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Men
enu
Sleep
u
+
Level-
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
-
Display
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
VOL
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
rn
Muting
Playlist
Random
Listening Mode
CH Sel
Level+
Use the remote controller’s
[CH Sel] button to select each
speaker, and use the [Level–] and
[Level+] buttons to adjust the volume.
You can adjust the volume of each
speaker from –12 dB to +12 dB
(–15 dB to +12 dB for the subwoofer).
Muting
Display
Rec
CH Sel
Receiver
Dimmer
Dimmer
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listening to an input source. These temporary adjustments are
cancelled when the AV receiver is set to Standby.
9
D.TUN
Phono
Adjusting Speaker Levels
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Direct
THX
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close
Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
Re-EQ
VCR
DVD
HDD
Subtitle
Play Mode
Level – +
Notes:
• You cannot use this function while the AV receiver is
muted.
• Speakers that are set to No or None in the Speaker
Configuration cannot be adjusted (see page 96).
■ Headphones
While a pair of headphones is connected, you can use the
[CH Sel], [Level–], and [Level+] buttons to adjust the
volume of each headphone speaker (left and right), from
–12 dB to +12 dB each.
RC-691M
These settings are stored when the AV receiver is set to
Standby.
Phones
Dimmer
Display
Muting the AV Receiver
Setting the Display Brightness
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.
You can adjust the brightness of the display.
Remote
controller
Dimmer
Press the remote controller’s
[Dimmer] button repeatedly to
select: Normal, Dim, or Dimmer.
You can also use the AV receiver’s
[Dimmer] button (not Australian models).
Muting
Press the remote controller’s
[Muting] button.
The output is muted and the MUTING
indicator flashes on the display.
AV receiver
To unmute the AV receiver, press the remote controller’s [Muting] button again, or adjust the volume. The
output is unmuted and the MUTING indicator goes off.
Muting is cancelled when the AV receiver is set to
Standby.
Tip:
You can specify how much the output is muted with the
Muting Level setting (see page 106).
79
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 80 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Common Functions—Continued
Using the Sleep Timer
Displaying Source Information
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver so that
it turns off automatically after a specified period.
Sleep
Press the remote controller’s
[Sleep] button repeatedly to
select the required sleep time.
You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10
minutes in 10 minute steps.
The SLEEP indicator appears on the
display when the sleep timer has been
set, as shown. The specified sleep time
appears on the display for about 5 seconds, then the previous display reappears.
SLEEP indicator
You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
Remote
controller
Press the [Display] button
repeatedly to cycle through the
available information.
Display
AV receiver
The following information can typically be displayed:
Input source
Listening
mode
To cancel the sleep timer, press the [Sleep] button
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.
To check the remaining sleep time, press the [Sleep]
button. Note that if you press the [Sleep] button while the
sleep time is being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep
time by 10 minutes.
Using Headphones
For private listening, you can connect a pair of stereo
headphones (1/4-inch phone plug) to the AV receiver’s
Phones jack.
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
READY
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
PURE AUDIO
AUDIO SEL
ZONE 2
PHONES
OFF
POWER
ON
OFF
ZONE 3
Notes:
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the Phones
jack, the speakers are turned off and the Headphone
indicator lights up. (The Powered Zone 2 speakers are
not turned off.)
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it was already set to
Mono, Stereo, or Direct, in which case it stays the
same.
80
Signal format*
Sampling
frequency
*If the input signal is analog, no format information is
displayed. If the input signal is PCM, the sampling frequency is displayed. If the input signal is digital but not
PCM, the signal format and the number of channels is
displayed. For some digital input signals, including multichannel PCM, the signal format, number of channels,
and sampling frequency is displayed.
Information is displayed for about 3 seconds, then the
previous display reappears.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 81 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Common Functions—Continued
Selecting Audio Inputs
Specifying the Digital Signal Format
1 2
Rec
Playlist
Random
Listening Mode
Audio Sel
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Direct
THX
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close
Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
Re-EQ
VCR
DVD
HDD
Play Mode
RC-691M
If you connect a component to more than one audio
input, such as a DVD player connected to analog, digital,
multichannel, and HDMI inputs, you can use the [Audio
Sel] button to select which audio input you want to use
to listen to that component.
Audio Sel
Press the [Audio Sel] button
repeatedly to select an audio
input: HDMI > Auto > Multich >
Analog.
HDMI: Selects the assigned HDMI
IN, and the HDMI indicator
appears on the display. (The
HDMI IN must already be
assigned to the current input
selector. See page 46.)
Auto: Selects the assigned COAXIAL or OPTICAL DIGITAL
IN, and the DIGITAL indicator appears on the display.
(The DIGITAL IN must
already be assigned to the
current input selector. See
page 50.) If there is no digital
signal, the analog input is
used instead.
Multich: Selects the multichannel
input, and the ANALOG indicator appears on the display.
(The multichannel input must
already be assigned to the
current input selector. See
page 52.)
Analog: Selects the analog input, and
the ANALOG indicator
appears on the display.
You can also use the [Audio Selector]
button on the AV receiver.
Normally, the AV receiver detects the format of digital
input signals automatically. However, if you experience
either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS
sources, you can specify the signal format manually.
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut
off, try the PCM setting.
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or rewinding a DTS CD, try the DTS setting.
1
Press the [Audio Selector] button
repeatedly to select Auto.
2
While “Auto” is shown on the display, use the Tone Plus [+] and
Minus [–] buttons to select:
PCM: Only input signals in PCM
format are output, and the
PCM indicator lights up. The
indicator flashes if the input
signal is not PCM.
DTS: Only input signals in DTS
format are output, and the
DTS indicator lights up. The
indicator flashes if the input
signal is not DTS.
Auto (default): The format is detected
automatically. If no digital
input signal is present, the
analog input is used instead.
81
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 82 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Using the Listening Modes
Selecting the Listening Modes
Selecting with the Remote Controller
Top
For a description of each listening mode, see “About the
Listening Modes” on page 87.
CH
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes
can only be selected if your DVD player is
connected to the AV receiver with a digital
audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).
Prev
CH
Selecting on the AV Receiver
Stereo
u
Gu
id
Se
VOL
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
rn
Display
Rec
• While a pair of headphones is connected,
you can only select the Mono, Direct, or Stereo listening mode.
Men
u
Enter
Disc
Album
-
• The listening modes you can select depends
on the format of the input signal. To check
the format, see “Displaying Source Information” on page 80.
Men
+
Muting
Playlist
Random
Surround
,
Listening Mode
Stereo
Direct
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Direct
THX
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close
Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
Re-EQ
VCR
DVD
HDD
Subtitle
Play Mode
All ST
THX
RC-691M
■ [Stereo] button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
■ [Surround] button
This button selects the Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes.
■ Listening Mode [ ]/[ ] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the current input source.
Listening Mode
82
■ [Direct] button
This button selects the Direct listening mode.
■ [Stereo] button
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
■ [THX] button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
■ Listening Mode [ ]/[ ] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the current input source.
■ [All ST] button
This button selects the All Channel Stereo listening
mode.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 83 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format
Analog and PCM Sources
PCM
Source format
32–96
kHz
Media
Button
[Direct]
Listening Mode
CD, TV, radio,
✔
✔
Direct
[Stereo] Stereo
Multi
channel
176.4/
192kHz*1 analog
✔
✔
Multichannel PCM
except */2
DVD
✔
176.4/192 kHz*1
2ch 1/0, 1+1 Multichannel
2ch
32–96 kHz
*/2
DVD
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Multichannel
✔
✔
✔
DVD
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
[Surround]
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
Neo:6
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
THX Cinema
[THX]
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX*3
✔*2
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX*3
✔*3
✔
✔
Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode
✔
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Onkyo
Original DSP
Listening Mode*4
[ ]/[ ]
Mono
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
*3
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
✔
✔
✔
✔
DVD-Audio discs output multichannel 176.4/192 kHz PCM only via HDMI.
If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
Available only when using surround speakers.
For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, PCM of 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are processed at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
and 88.2 kHz respectively.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
83
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 84 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DSD, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Digital Plus Sources
DSD*1
Multichannel
Source format
3/2
Media
Button
Listening Mode
[Direct]
Direct
[Stereo]
Stereo
2ch
Dolby D
Multichannel
except
*/2
*/2
SACD
✔*2
✔
Dolby Digital Plus
Multichannel
2ch
1/0, 1+1 except
*/2
DVD, DTV, etc.
✔*2
✔
*/2
2ch
1/0, 1+1
Blu-ray, HD DVD
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔*3
✔*3
Multichannel
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
[Surround]
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD
DSD
✔
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*4
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
✔
✔
Neo:6
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Neural THX 5.1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII THX Games Mode
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Onkyo
Original DSP
Mono
Listening Mode
[ ]/[ ]
✔
THX Cinema*5
Neural THX 7.1
[THX]
✔
Mono Movie
Orchestra
5
Unplugged *
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1. In listening modes other than DSD Direct, DSD sources are converted and handled as PCM.
*2. With the Delay Enable DSD setting on the Direct screen set to No (see page 93), if the source is DSD, the Direct listening mode becomes DSD Direct,
“DSD Direct” appears on the display, and the Speaker Configuration settings are ignored.
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, depending on the input signal, Dolby Digital may be used.
*4. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*5. Available only when using surround speakers.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
84
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 85 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
TrueHD and DTS Sources
TrueHD*1
Multichannel
except
*/2
*/2
Source format
Media
Button
Listening Mode
[Direct]
Direct
[Stereo]
Stereo
DTS, DTS96/24
2ch
1/0, 1+1
except
*/2
*/2
Blu-ray, HD DVD
✔
✔
✔
✔
1/0
DTS-ES
Discrete/
Matrix
✔
✔
✔
✔
Multichannel
✔
✔
2ch
DVD, CD, etc.
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Multichannel
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
✔*2
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
✔
[Surround]
TrueHD
✔
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*3
✔
Neo:6
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Neural THX 5.1
Neural THX 7.1
THX Cinema
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔
Neo:6 THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
✔
✔
✔
✔
THX Surround EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
Onkyo
Original DSP
Listening Mode*5
[ ]/[ ]
Mono
Mono Movie
Orchestra
4
Unplugged *
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby PLII THX Games Mode
[THX]
✔
✔
✔
✔
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
192 kHz TrueHD sources are processed as 192 kHz/2-channel audio signal, regardless its number of channels.
If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, DTS is used.
If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
Available only when using surround speakers.
For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, DTS 96/24 is processed as DTS.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
85
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 86 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS-HD Sources
DTS-HD High Resolution
Source format
Multichannel
except */2
*/2
Media
Button
Listening Mode
[Direct]
Direct
[Stereo]
Stereo
2ch
1/0
DTS-HD Master Audio*1
Multichannel
2ch
except */2
*/2
Blu-ray, HD DVD
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1/0
Blu-ray, HD DVD
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Multichannel
Dolby D
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
[Surround]
TrueHD
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
✔*3
✔*3
✔
✔
Dolby PLII Music/
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
Dolby PLIIx Game*2
✔*3
✔*3
✔
✔
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX
✔*3
Neo:6
✔*3
✔
Neo:6 Music
✔*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
THX Cinema*2
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX
Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
Mono
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔*3
✔*3
✔*3
✔*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*4
192 kHz DTS-HD Master Audio sources are processed at 96 kHz.
If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
Depending on the source (e.g., 96 kHz sources), processing may be performed after DTS decoding.
Available only when using surround speakers.
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.
86
✔
✔
✔
THX Ultra2 Cinema
Onkyo
Original DSP
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
THX Surround EX
Mono Movie
Orchestra
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
✔
✔
Neo:6 THX Games Mode
Listening Mode
[ ]/[ ]
✔
✔*3
Neural THX 7.1
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
✔
Neo:6 Cinema
Neural THX 5.1
[THX]
✔
✔*3
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 87 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
About the Listening Modes
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.
Dolby Digital Plus
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest multichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 48 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal
resolution.
Direct
Dolby TrueHD
In this mode, audio from the input source is output
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidelity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are
output as they are.
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc formats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete
channels of lossless audio performance with 96 kHz/24bit sampling rate and signal resolution.
The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to
96 kHz and 2-channel sources up to 192 kHz.
Stereo
Sound is output by the front left and right speakers.
Mono
Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of
some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other
sources containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke
DVDs.
Multichannel
This mode is for use with analog or PCM multichannel
sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-channel playback. It provides a very natural and seamless surround-sound experience that fully envelops the listener.
As well as music and movies, video games can also benefit from the dramatic spatial effects and vivid imaging.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, Dolby
Pro Logic II will be used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).
• Dolby PLIIx Music
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,
TV, VHS, DVD).
• Dolby PLIIx Game
Use this mode with video games, especially those
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.
Dolby Digital
Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital
logo and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you
right in the middle of the action, just like being in a
movie theater or concert hall.
Dolby EX
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital
EX soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.
DTS NEO:6
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-channel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels of
matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, providing
a very natural and seamless surround sound experience
that fully envelops the listener.
• NEO:6 Cinema
Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
• NEO:6 Music
Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
DTS
The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to
5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for highfidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that
bear the DTS logo.
DTS 96/24
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is
high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and
24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.
DTS-ES Discrete
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks
that use a discrete surround-back channel for true
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate
audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan
across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear
the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Discrete soundtrack.
DTS-ES Matrix
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks
that use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTSES logo.
DTS-HD High Resolution
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest multichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 96 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal
resolution.
87
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 88 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
DTS-HD Master Audio
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc formats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete channels of uncompressed digital audio with 96 kHz/24-bit
sampling rate and signal resolution.
The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to
96 kHz and 5.1-channel sources up to 192 kHz.
Neural THX 5.1/7.1
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby
Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known
as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint development between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.
Onkyo Original DSP Modes
Neural-THX Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing, which allows delivery of a
more detailed sound stage, with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. The Neural THX
5.1 and Neural THX 7.1 modes can expand any 2-channel stereo source for 5.1- or 7.1-channel playback,
respectively. Use them with CD, radio, cassette, TV,
VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel stereo sources, including video games. Neural-THX Surround can also be
used by broadcasters to encode and transmit surroundsound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can
enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo. XM
Satellite Radio, for example, is using Neural-THX Surround on select channels, which the AV receiver can
expand from 5.1 channels to 7.1 channels.
Mono Movie
DSD
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acoustic image, like being at a club or rock concert.
DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format
used to store digital audio on Super Audio CDs (SACD).
This mode can be used with SACDs that feature multichannel audio.
THX
Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent standards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie theaters and home theaters just as the director intended.
• THX Cinema
This mode is for watching movies, which are typically recorded and edited on the assumption that they
will be played in a sizable place like a movie theater.
It carefully optimizes the tonal and spatial characteristics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the
smaller home-theater environment. It can be used
with 2-channel sources processed with other formats, and multichannel sources. Surround back
speaker output depends on the source material and
the selected listening mode.
• THX Ultra2 Cinema
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1channel playback. It does this by analyzing the composition of the surround source, optimizing the
ambient and directional sounds to produce the surround back channel output.
• THX Music Mode
This mode is designed for use with music. It expands
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
• THX Games Mode
This mode is designed for use with video games. It
can expand 2-channel and 5.1-channel sources for
6.1/7.1-channel playback.
88
• THX Surround EX
This mode is suitable for old movies and other mono
sources. The center speaker outputs the sound as it is,
while reverb is applied to the sound output by the other
speakers, giving presence to even mono material.
Orchestra
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the
stereo image and simulates the natural reverberation of a
large hall.
Unplugged
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the
impression of being right in front of the stage.
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows produced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire
sound, and clarity to voices.
All Ch Stereo
Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire listening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,
and surround back speakers.
Full Mono
In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of
where you are within the listening room.
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)
With this mode, you can enjoy virtual 5.1 surround
sound even with only two or three speakers. It works by
controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and right
ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.
Note:
• Since the Onkyo original DSP modes use the Dolby
PLIIx and Neo:6 circuits for processing, when one of
these modes is selected, the PLIIx indicator, or Neo:6
indicator for multichannel sources, lights up.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 89 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Recording
This section explains how to record the input source and
how to record audio and video from separate sources.
Notes:
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot
be recorded.
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.
• Sources connected to the analog multichannel input
cannot be recorded.
• Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer to
the manuals supplied with your digital recording
equipment for more details.
• Digital input signals are output by only the digital outputs, and analog input signals are output by only the
analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from
digital to analog or vice versa.
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.
Recording from Different AV Sources
You can overdub audio onto your video recordings by
simultaneously recording audio and video from two separate sources. This is possible because only the audio
source is switched when an audio-only input source,
such as TAPE, TUNER, or CD, is selected, the video
source remains the same.
In the following example, audio from the CD player connected to the CD IN and video from the camcorder connected to the AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded
by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.
Camcorder
Recording the Input Source
video signal
audio signal
Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cassette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TAPE OUT or
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT jacks. Video sources can be
recorded to a video recorder (e.g., VCR, DVR) connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. See pages 26 to 42
for hookup information.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
AM
FM75
OUT 1
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZO
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
CR/PR
S
S
IN
IN 2
Use the input selector buttons to
select the source that you want
to record.
See “Which Connections Should I
Use?” on page 27 to see which signals
can be output and recorded.
IN 3
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
(VCR/DVR)
L
1
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
CENTER
SURR L
PRE OUT
FRONT L
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
CD player
VCR
You can watch the source while recording it. The AV receiver’s Master Volume control has no effect on recording.
Remote
controller
DVD
VCR/DVR
1
2
3
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
CBL/SAT
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
1
Prepare the camcorder and CD player for
playback.
2
Prepare the VCR for recording.
3
Press the [AUX 2] input selector button.
4
Press the [CD] input selector button.
This selects the CD player as the audio source but
leaves the camcorder as the video source.
5
Start recording on the VCR, then start
playback on the camcorder and CD player.
Video from the camcorder and audio from the CD
player are recorded by the VCR.
Phono
+10
2
On your recorder, start recording.
3
On the source component, start
playback.
Note:
• If you select a different input source during recording,
that input source will be recorded instead.
89
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 90 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Onscreen Setup Menus
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a convenient way to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are organized
into eight categories on the main menu, most containing a submenu.
Menu
1.Input/Output Assign
2.Speaker Setup
3.Audio Adjust
4.Source Setup
5.ListeningMode Preset
6.Miscellaneous
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup
Menu Map
The following map shows how the setup menus are organized. Use the page numbers to locate information about items.
Main menu
Submenu
Menu
1.Input/Output Assign
1.Input/Output Assign
2.Speaker Setup
3.Audio Adjust
4.Source Setup
5.Listening Mode Preset
6.Miscellaneous
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
6.Miscellaneous
1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup
7.Hardware Setup
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
8.Lock Setup
Lock
< Unlocked >
☞ page 106
page 58
☞ page 108
page 59
☞ page 110
3.Audio Adjust
☞ pages 96–102
page 44
☞ page 92
1.Tone Control
2.Direct
3.Multiplex/Mono
4.PL x/Neo:6
5.Dolby EX
6.Theater-Dimensional
7.LFE Level
4.Source Setup
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
☞ pages 103–104
5.Listening Mode Preset
☞ page 94
1.DVD
2.VCR/DVR
3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
5.AUX1
6.AUX2
7.TAPE
8.TUNER
9.CD
10.PHONO
90
☞ pages 45–52
1.Monitor Out
2.HDMI Input
3.Component Video Input
4.Digital Input
5.Analog Input
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 91 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Adjusting the Listening Modes
Using the Late Night Function
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
With the Late Night function, you can reduce the
dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can
still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume
levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you
don’t want to disturb anyone.
TV
Input
CD
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Receiver
Macro
1
2
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
Men
Men
u
Receiver
L Night
u
+
Enter
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
-
Setup
Receiver
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
VOL
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
rn
Display
Rec
Muting
Playlist
Stereo
Surround
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
Direct
THX
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Open/Close
Video Off
Level-
Level+
Audio Sel
L Night
Re-EQ
VCR
DVD
HDD
RC-691M
Re-EQ
L Night
Using the Re-EQ Function
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,
making it more suitable for home theater viewing.
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro
Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS, DTSES, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS 96/24, THX Cinema,
THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, and Multichannel.
Receiver
Off: Late Night function off
(default).
Low: Small reduction in dynamic
range.
High: Large reduction in dynamic
range.
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options
are:
Random
Listening Mode
Repeat
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, and then press the
[L Night] button repeatedly.
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital
Plus sources, the options are:
Auto: The dynamic range is controlled automatically based
on the source material and the
current volume setting
(default).
Off: Late Night function off.
On: Late Night function on.
Notes:
• The Late Night function can be used only when the
input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or
Dolby TrueHD.
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the
material that you are playing and the intention of the
original sound designer, and with some material there
will be little or no effect when you select the different
options.
• The Late Night function is set to Off when the AV
receiver is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources,
it will be set to Auto.
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the [ReEQ] button.
Press the [Re-EQ] button again to turn
off the Re-EQ function.
Re-EQ
91
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 92 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
Audio Adjust
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.
1
Receiver
Se
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
tu p
2
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Audio
Adjust,” and then press [Enter].
The Audio Adjust menu appears.
Tone Control Settings
You can adjust the tone (bass and treble) of the front,
center, surround, and surround back speakers individually. For the subwoofer, you can adjust the bass.
■ Bass
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds from –10 dB
to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
■ Treble
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds from
–10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
Note:
• The tone control circuits are bypassed when the Direct
listening mode is selected.
Adjusting the Tone on the AV Receiver
1
3.Audio Adjust
Enter
3
Enter
1.Tone Control
2.Direct
3.Multiplex/Mono
4.PL x/Neo:6
5.Dolby EX
6.Theater-Dimensional
7.LFE Level
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [Enter].
The screen for that item appears.
Enter
4
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an option, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to change it.
The Audio Adjust menu items are
explained below.
Enter
5
Se
92
tu p
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
Setup closes.
2
1
Press the AV receiver’s [Tone]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble for Front, Center, Surround, SurrBack, or Subwoofer.
2
Use the Tone Plus [+] and Minus
[–] buttons to adjust.
Notes:
• The tone cannot be adjusted on the AV receiver when
the Direct listening mode is selected.
• The tone control settings do not apply to the THX listening modes.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 93 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
Direct Setting
PLIIx/Neo:6 Settings
Delay Enable
PLIIx Music (2 ch Input)
■ DSD
This setting determines whether or not DSD (SACD)
audio signals are passed through the DSP for A/V Sync,
delay, etc., processing when the Direct listening mode is
selected.
No: DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.
Yes: DSD signals are processed by the DSP.
Multiplex/Mono Settings
Multiplex
■ Input Ch
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV
broadcasts, and so on.
Main: The main channel is output (default).
Sub: The sub channel is output.
Main/Sub: Both the main and sub channels are output.
Mono
■ Input Ch
This setting determines which channel is output when
the Mono listening mode is used with a stereo source.
L+R: Both the left and right channels are output
(default).
L: Only the left channel is output.
R: Only the right channel is output.
■ Output Speaker
This setting determines which speakers output mono
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
L/R: Mono audio is output by the front left and right
speakers.
C: Mono audio is output by the center speaker
(default).
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro
Logic IIx.
■ Panorama
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode.
On: Panorama function on.
Off: Panorama function off (default).
■ Dimension
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward
or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode. It can be adjusted from –3 to +3. The
default value is 0. Higher settings move the sound field
forward. Lower settings move it backward.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
surround sound, move the sound field forward to
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround
sound, move it backward.
■ Center Width
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a
center speaker, the center channel sound is output by
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to
the front left and right speakers to create a phantom center). This setting controls the front left, right, and center
mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the center
channel sound. It can be adjusted from 0 to 7. The default
value is 3.
Neo:6 Music
■ Center Image
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the
center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5. The
default value is 3.
When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is
attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the
sound is located centrally. This setting works well when
the listening position is considerably off center. When
set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenuated, maintaining the original stereo balance.
93
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 94 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
■ DSD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DSD sources.
Dolby Digital Settings
■ Dolby EX
This setting determines how Dolby EX signals are handled.
Auto: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening
mode.
Manual: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
any of the listening modes compatible with this
format (e.g., Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,
etc.).
T–D (Theater-Dimensional) Setting
■ Listening Angle
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.
Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be equidistant from the listening position and at an angle close
to one of the two available settings.
■ Multich PCM
Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM
sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)
Listening Mode Presets
On the Listening Mode Preset menu, you can specify a
default listening mode for each of the audio formats supported by each input selector. The AV receiver will then
select the listening mode automatically depending on the
format of the input signal. You can still select the other
listening modes, although the default listening mode will
be used the next time you turn on the AV receiver.
Input Selector
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
TV
Cable
Dock
SAT
Front right speaker
Men
CH
Men
u
Enter
Disc
Album
-
Setup
u
Receiver
+
Enter
30˚
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
Front left speaker
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
e
tu p
t
Ex i
Retu
Display
Rec
VOL
rn
Muting
Playlist
Random
Narrow: Select if the angle is less than 30 degrees.
Wide: Select if the angle is greater than 30 degrees.
1
Receiver
LFE Level Settings
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby
Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM sources. The level
can be set to –∞, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB
or –∞ dB.
■ Dolby D
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital
sources.
■ DTS
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS sources.
■ Dolby TrueHD
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby TrueHD
sources.
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS-HD Master
Audio sources.
94
Se
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
tu p
2
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. Listening
Mode Preset,” and then press
[Enter].
The Listening Mode Preset menu
appears.
5.Listening Mode Preset
Enter
1.DVD
2.VCR/DVR
3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
5.AUX1
6.AUX2
7.TAPE
8.TUNER
9.CD
10.PHONO
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 95 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued
3
Enter
Dolby TrueHD: Specifies the default
listening mode for Dolby TrueHD
sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD
(input via HDMI).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selector, and then press [Enter].
The audio formats supported by that
input selector appear.
DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the
default listening mode for DTS-HD
Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray
or HD DVD (input via HDMI).
5-x.Listening Mode Preset
Enter
Analog/PCM
Dolby Digital
DTS
D.F.2ch
D.F.Mono
Last
Last
Last
Last
Last
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
If the input selector is assigned to an
HDMI IN, use the Down [ ] button to
select the audio formats shown on the
following screen.
DSD Multi: Specifies the default listening mode for DSD multichannel
sources, such as SACD.
5
Se
tu p
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
Setup closes.
5-x.Listening Mode Preset
Multich PCM
192k/176.4k
Dolby True HD
DTS-HD Master Audio
DSD
Last
Last
Last
Last
Last
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
For the TUNER input selector, Analog
is the only format available.
4
Enter
Enter
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an audio format, and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a listening mode.
Only listening modes compatible with
the audio format can be selected (see
page 83).
Analog/PCM: Specifies the default listening mode for analog and PCM
sources.
Dolby Digital: Specifies the default listening mode for Dolby Digital sources.
DTS: Specifies the default listening
mode for DTS sources.
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening
mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources
in a digital format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.
D.F. Mono: Specifies the default listening mode for mono sources in a digital
format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.
Multich PCM: Specifies the default
listening mode for multichannel PCM
sources, such as DVD-Audio (input via
HDMI).
192/176.4k: Specifies the default listening mode for high resolution
192 kHz and 176.4 kHz digital sources,
such as DVD-Audio.
95
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 96 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup
Speaker Setup
1
This section explains items on the Speaker Config menu.
Receiver
Some of the speaker settings are set automatically by the
Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 53).
Se
Input Selector
Macro
1
2
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
tu p
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
To
en
pM
u
Men
Receiver
u
2
+
Enter
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
-
Setup
Receiver
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
e
tu p
VOL
t
Ex i
Retu
Display
Rec
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
rn
2.Speaker Setup
Muting
Playlist
Enter
Random
Listening Mode
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
Speaker Settings
See “Speaker Settings” on page 44.
3
Speaker Configuration
Enter
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 53).
2-2.Speaker Config
Enter
With the Speaker Configuration settings, you can specify
which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency
for each speaker.
The following crossover frequencies can be specified:
Full Band, 40 Hz, 45 Hz, 50 Hz, 55 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz,
80 Hz (THX), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 130 Hz,
150 Hz, or 200 Hz.
Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low-frequency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify
a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover frequency will then be output by the subwoofer instead of
the speaker. Refer to your speakers’ manuals to determine the optimum crossover frequencies.
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, specify
80 Hz (THX) for all speakers.
96
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Config,” and then press [Enter].
The Speaker Config screen appears.
4
Enter
Enter
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch
LPF of LFE
Double Bass
Yes
Full Band
100Hz
100Hz
100Hz
2ch
120Hz
On
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Subwoofer,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Yes: Select if a subwoofer is connected.
No: Select if no subwoofer is connected.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 97 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
5
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Front,” and
then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
Note:
• Fixed at Full Band if Subwoofer
(step 4) is set to No.
Enter
6
Enter
Enter
7
Enter
Enter
8
Enter
Enter
9
Enter
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Center,” and
then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no center speaker is connected, select
None.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surr Back Ch,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
1ch: Select if one surround back
speaker is connected.
2ch: Select if two (left and right)
surround back speakers are
connected.
Note:
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set
to Bi-Amp (page 44), SurrBack is set
to None (step 8), or Powered Zone 2
is being used (page 113).
Continue with step 10 on the next page.
Note:
• Cannot select Full Band if Front
(step 5) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surround,” and
then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no surround left and right speakers
are connected, select None.
Note:
• Cannot select Full Band if Front
(step 5) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surr Back,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
If no surround back speakers are connected, select None.
Notes:
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set
to Bi-Amp (page 44), Surround is set
to None (step 7), or Powered Zone 2
is being used (page 113).
• Cannot select Full Band if Surround
(step 7) is set to anything other than
Full Band.
97
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 98 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel
Double Bass
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 53).
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 53).
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to
sources that use the LFE channel.
With this setting, you can boost bass output by feeding
front left and right channel bass sounds to the subwoofer.
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select
80 Hz (THX).
10
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “LPF of LFE,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a lowpass filter frequency.
The following low-pass filter frequencies can be selected: 80 Hz (THX),
90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, or 120 Hz.
This setting can only be made if the Subwoofer setting in
step 4 is set to Yes, and the Front setting in step 5 is set
to Full Band.
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select Off
(THX).
11
Enter
Enter
Enter
Continue with step 11 in the next column.
12
Se
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Double Bass,”
and then use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Off (THX): The subwoofer only outputs the LFE channel.
On: In addition to LFE channel
sounds, the subwoofer outputs front left and right channel bass sounds.
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
tu p
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
98
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 99 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
Speaker Distance
4
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 53).
Enter
With the Speaker Distance settings, you can specify the
distance from each speaker to the listening position.
1
Receiver
Se
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Enter
5
tu p
Enter
2
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
Enter
2.Speaker Setup
Enter
3
Enter
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Speaker Distance,” and then press [Enter].
The Speaker Distance screen appears.
2-3.Speaker Distance
Enter
Unit
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
feet
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
12.0ft
Note:
• Speakers that you set to No or None
in the Speaker Configuration
(page 96) cannot be selected.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Unit,” and then
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select:
feet: Select if you want to enter
distances in feet. Can be set
from 0.2 to 30 feet in 0.2-foot
steps.
meters: Select if you want to enter
distances in meters. Can be
set from 0.06 to 9 meters in
0.06-meter steps.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a speaker, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to specify the distance.
Specify the distance from the speaker
to your listening position.
Notes:
• The Center distance cannot be set if
Center is set to None in the Speaker
Configuration (page 96).
• The Surr Right and Surr Left distances cannot be set if Surround is set
to None in the Speaker Configuration
(page 96).
• The Surr Back R and Surr Back L
distances cannot be set if Speaker
Type is set to Bi-Amp (page 44),
Surr Back is set to None in the
Speaker Configuration (page 96), or
Powered Zone 2 is being used
(page 113).
• The Subwoofer distance cannot be
set if Subwoofer is set to No (step 4).
6
Repeat step 5 for each speaker.
7
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
Se
tu p
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
99
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 100 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
Speaker Level Calibration
4
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 53).
With the Level Calibration settings, you can adjust the
level of each speaker while listening to the test tone so
that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listening position.
Note:
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX,
which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you normally listen at volume settings below this, be careful
because the test tone will be much louder.
1
Receiver
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Enter
5
Repeat step 4 for each speaker
so that the volume of the test
tone from each speaker is the
same.
If you’re using a handheld sound level
meter, adjust the level of each speaker
so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening position, measured with C-weighting and slow reading.
6
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
Se
Se
tu p
tu p
2
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
2.Speaker Setup
Enter
3
Enter
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Level Calibration,” and then press [Enter].
The Level Calibration screen appears
and the pink noise test tone is output by
the front left speaker.
2-4.Level Calibration
Enter
Left
Center
Right
Surr Right
Surr Back R
Surr Back L
Surr Left
Subwoofer
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-12.0dB
-15.0dB
Note:
• Levels cannot be adjusted for speakers set to No or None in the Speaker
Configuration (page 96).
100
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a speaker, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to adjust the level.
Levels can be adjusted from –12 to
+12 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB
for the subwoofer).
Note:
• Speaker levels can also be adjusted by using the dedicated buttons on the remote controller. Press the [Test
Tone] button to output the test tone. Use the [CH Sel]
button to select each speaker, and use the [Level–] and
[Level+] buttons to adjust the level.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 101 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
Equalizer Settings
4
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 53).
Enter
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of
speakers individually with a 15-band equalizer. The volume of each speaker can be set on page 100.
1
Receiver
Se
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
5
tu p
Enter
2
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to set the “Equalizer”
option to:
Off: Equalizer off, flat response.
Manual: The equalizer for each
speaker can be set manually.
Audyssey:The equalizer for each
speaker is set automatically
by the Automatic Speaker
Setup function.
If you selected Manual, continue with
the next step. If you selected Off or
Audyssey, go to step 8.
Use the Down [ ] button to
select “Channel,” and then use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select the speaker.
You can select: Front, Center, Surround, Surr Back, or Subwoofer.
Enter
2.Speaker Setup
Enter
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
6
Enter
3
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. Equalizer
Settings,” and then press [Enter].
The Equalizer Settings screen appears.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons move between the two screens.
2-5.Equalizer Settings
Enter
Equalizer
Channel
25Hz
40Hz
63Hz
100Hz
160Hz
250Hz
400Hz
Manual
Front
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a frequency,
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to cut or boost
that frequency.
You can select: 25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz,
100 Hz, 160 Hz, 250 Hz, 400 Hz,
630 Hz, 1000 Hz, 1600 Hz, 2500 Hz,
4000 Hz, 6300 Hz, 10000 Hz, or
16000 Hz. And for the subwoofer,
25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz, 100 Hz, or
160 Hz.
Each band can be cut or boosted from
–6 dB to +6 dB in 1 dB steps.
Tip: Low frequencies, such as 160 Hz,
affect bass sounds; high frequencies,
such as 6300 Hz, affect treble sounds.
2-5.Equalizer Settings
630Hz
1000Hz
1600Hz
2500Hz
4000Hz
6300Hz
10000Hz
16000Hz
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
101
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 102 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
7
Enter
Use the Up [ ] button to select
“Channel” again, and use the
Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select another speaker.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each speaker.
2
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
2.Speaker Setup
Enter
Enter
3
8
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
Se
Enter
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “6. THX Audio
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The THX Audio Setup screen appears.
tu p
2-6.THX Audio Setup
Surr Back Sp Spacing
THX Subwoofer
BGC
1ft-4ft
Yes
Off
Enter
Notes:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
• The Equalizer settings have no effect on 176.4/
192 kHz input signals.
4
Enter
THX Audio Setup
These settings are not set automatically by the Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 53).
With the Surr Back Sp Spacing setting, you can specify
the distance between your surround back speakers.
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the THX
Subwoofer setting to Yes. You can then apply THX’s
Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the
perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners
sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).
1
Receiver
Se
102
tu p
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surr Back Sp
Spacing,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to specify
the distance between your surround back speakers:
< 1 ft (< 0.3 m) (Default): Select this if
your surround back speakers are
between 0 and 1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.
1–4 ft (0.3–1.2 m): Select this if your
surround back speakers are between 1
and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.
>4 ft (>1.2 m): Select this if your surround back speakers are more than 4
feet (1.2 m) apart.
Note:
• This setting is only available if the
Surr Back Ch setting in the Speaker
Configuration is set to 2ch (page 97).
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 103 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
5
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “THX Subwoofer,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
No: Select this if you do not have
a THX-certified subwoofer.
Yes: Select this if you have a THXcertified subwoofer.
Enter
2
Se
Press the [Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
tu p
3
Enter
Enter
6
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “BGC,” and use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Off: Select this to turn off BGC.
On: Select this to turn on BGC.
Enter
Note:
• This setting is only available if THX
Subwoofer is set to Yes (step 5).
Enter
4.Source Setup
Enter
4
Enter
7
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Source Setup menu appears. The
name of the currently selected input
selector is displayed in a box.
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [Enter].
The screen for that item appears.
Press the [Setup] button.
The setup menu closes.
Se
tu p
Enter
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
5
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an option, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to change it.
The Source Setup menu items are
explained below.
Source Setup
Enter
This section explains items on the Source Setup menu.
Items can be set individually for each input selector.
1
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, and then use the
input selector buttons to select
an input source.
Receiver
DVD
VCR/DVR
1
2
3
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
CBL/SAT
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
Phono
+10
103
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 104 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
6
Se
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
Setup closes.
tu p
Name Edit
You can enter a custom name for each individual input
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When
selected, the custom name will appear on the display.
1
Select the input selector to which
you want to give a custom name.
To name a radio preset, use the [Tuner]
button to select AM or FM, and then
select the preset.
2
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
IntelliVolume
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your
source components is louder or quieter than the others.
Receiver
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an
input selector, and use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to set the level.
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use
the Left [ ] button to reduce its input level. If it’s
noticeably quieter, use the Right [ ] button to increase
its input level. The input level can be adjusted from
–12 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.
Note:
• IntelliVolume does not apply for Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Se
tu p
3
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Source Setup menu appears.
A/V Sync
4.Source Setup
When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning
function, you may find that the picture and sound are out
of sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this
by applying a delay to the audio signal. The delay can be
set from 0 to 250 milliseconds (msec) in 5 millisecond
steps.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an
input selector, and use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to set the delay.
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press
[Enter].
Enter
4
Enter
DVD
1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Name Edit,”
and then press [Enter].
The Name Edit screen appears.
4-3.Name Edit
4-2.A/V Sync
DVD
DVD
A/V Sync
(HDMI LipSync
100msec
60msec)
Display
Name
Default
[
]
Enter
Press Enter to see picture
If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 109), and your
TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed
delay time will be the A/V Sync delay time. The HDMI
Lip Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parentheses.
Note:
• A/V Sync cannot be set when the Direct listening
mode is used with an analog input source.
104
If you’re naming an item for the very
first time, go to step 6.
If the item already has a name, you can
select Default or Custom in step 5.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 105 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
5
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Display,” and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select:
Default: The default name is displayed.
Custom: The custom name is displayed.
Enter
When Default is selected, the station’s
frequency appears on the display when
a radio preset is selected.
6
Enter
Press the Down [ ] button to
select “Name,” and then press
[Enter] to open the character
input screen.
9
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
Se
tu p
Notes:
• To store a name, you must select “OK” and press
[Enter] in step 7, otherwise it will not be saved.
• You cannot enter a custom name for XM or SIRIUS
radio presets.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
Satellite Radio
4-3.Name Edit
Name
Enter
A B C D
N O P Q
a b c d
n o p q
[
]
E F G H I J K L M
R S T
e f g
r s t
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
( ) + * = / ,
U V W X Y Z
h i j k o m
u v w x y z
7
Enter
Enter
8
Enter
SIRIUS Parental Lock
7 8 9 - . ‘
: ; ! ? _
OK
This item is for use with satellite radio. It’s not available
if Satellite Radio is set to None (see page 109). See
pages 65–73 for more information.
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not
available if Satellite Radio is set to None or XM (see
page 109). See page 73 for more information.
Cancel
Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a character, and
then press [Enter].
Repeat this step to enter up to 10
characters.
To correct a character:
1. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
buttons to select the incorrect character, and then press [Enter]. The
character input screen opens.
2. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
buttons to select the correct character, and then press [Enter].
When you’ve finished, use the
arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons
to display the following screen,
select “OK,” and then press
[Enter].
4-3.Name Edit
Name
[
]
Enter
A B C D
N O P Q
a b c d
n o p q
E F G H I J K L M
R S T
e f g
r s t
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
( ) + * = / ,
U V W X Y Z
h i j k o m
u v w x y z
7 8 9 - . ‘
: ; ! ? _
OK
Cancel
“OK”
105
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 106 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
Miscellaneous Setup
4
This section explains items on the Miscellaneous menu.
Enter
+10
0
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to change it.
The items are explained below.
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
u
Men
Men
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
e
tu p
Rec
Receiver
Se
VOL
t
Ex i
Retu
Display
1
Enter
u
+
Enter
Setup
Receiver
Receiver
rn
5
Muting
Playlist
Se
Random
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
tu p
2
Enter
3
Enter
Enter
106
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
Volume Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select
“6. Miscellaneous,” and then
press [Enter].
The Miscellaneous menu appears.
6.Miscellaneous
Enter
tu p
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
Setup closes.
1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup
3.12V Trigger A
4.12V Trigger B
5.12V Trigger C
Setup
Setup
Setup
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [Enter].
The screen for that item appears.
■ Volume Display
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level
is displayed.
Absolute: Display range is Min, 0.5 through 99.5,
Max.
Relative: Display range is –∞ dB, –81.5 dB,
–81.0 dB through +18.0 dB.
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value
0 dB.
■ Muting Level
This setting determines how much the output is muted
when the Muting function is used (see page 79). It can be
set to –∞ dB (fully muted) or from –50 dB to –10 dB in
10 dB steps.
■ Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To disable this setting, select Off.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 107 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
■ Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be each
time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Relative, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.
Note:
• The Power On Volume setting cannot be set higher
than the Maximum Volume setting.
■ Headphone Level
With this setting, you can offset the headphone volume
relative to the main volume. This is useful if your headphones are too loud or too quiet at the volume setting you
usually use when listening through your speakers. The
headphone level can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB.
■ Zone2 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 2.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To disable this setting, select Off.
■ Zone2 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 2 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Relative, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
OSD Setup
■ Immediate Display
This setting determines whether operation details are
displayed onscreen immediately after an AV receiver
function is used.
On: Displayed (default).
Off: Not displayed.
Even if On is selected, operation details are not output if
the input source is connected to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN or HDMI IN.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that
Immediate Display be turned off.
■ Monitor Type
With this setting, you can specify the aspect ratio of your
TV so that menus are displayed properly.
4:3: Select if your TV is 4:3 (default).
16:9: Select if your TV is 16:9.
■ Display Position
This setting determines where on the screen operation
details are displayed.
Bottom: Bottom of the screen (default).
Top: Top of the screen.
■ TV Format
See “TV Format Setup (not North American models)” on
page 58.
12V Trigger A/B/C Setup
See “Using the 12V Triggers” on page 117.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.
■ Zone3 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 3.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To disable this setting, select Off.
■ Zone3 Power On Volume
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 3 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Relative, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.
107
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 108 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
Hardware Setup
4
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to change it.
The items are explained below.
This section explains items on the Hardware menu.
Enter
Remote
indicator
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
-
TV
Input
Number
buttons
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
+10
0
5
Se
D.TUN
Phono
Input
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
Setup closes.
tu p
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
TV
Cable
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
Men
u
Men
CH
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
e
tu p
Rec
Se
VOL
Remote Control
rn
Muting
Playlist
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
t
Ex i
Retu
Display
Receiver
u
Enter
Disc
Album
1
Receiver
+
Enter
Setup
Receiver
Random
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
tu p
■ Remote ID
When several Integra/Onkyo components are used in the
same room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differentiate the AV receiver from the other components,
you can change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or
3.
Note:
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure
to change the remote controller to the same ID (see
below), otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with
the remote controller.
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID
1
2
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
While holding down the
[Receiver] Remote Mode button,
press the TV [Input] button.
The Remote indicator flashes four
times.
Receiver
TV
Input
7.Hardware Setup
Enter
3
Enter
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich
5.HDMI
2
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
Use the number buttons to enter
ID 1, 2, or 3.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [Enter].
The screen for that item appears.
Zone 2 and Zone 3
See “Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 111.
108
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 109 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
Tuner
■ AM Freq Step (on some models)
See “AM Frequency Step Setup (on some models)” on
page 59.
■ Satellite Radio (on North American model)
If you connect an XM Satellite Radio antenna or SIRIUS
Satellite Radio antenna to the AV receiver (both sold separately), set this setting to XM or SIRIUS respectively. If
you connect both types of antenna, select XM/SIRIUS.
Otherwise, select None. See the separate Satellite Radio
Guide for more information.
Analog Multich
■ Subwoofer Input Sensitivity
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their
analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.
With this setting, you can change the AV receiver’s subwoofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note that
this setting only affects signals connected to the AV
receiver’s MULTI CH SUBWOOFER jack.
You can select 0 dB, 5 dB, 10 dB, or 15 dB.
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB
or 15 dB setting.
HDMI
■ HDMI Audio
This setting determines whether audio received by an
HDMI input is output by the HDMI OUT. You may want
to change this setting to On if your TV is connected to
the HDMI OUT and you want to listen to audio from an
HDMI component through your TV’s speakers. Normally, it should be set to Off.
Off: HDMI audio is not output (default).
On: HDMI audio is output.
Notes:
• If On is selected and the signal can be output by the
TV, the AV receiver will output no sound through its
speakers.
• When TV Control is enabled, this setting is set to
Auto.
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be
output even if On is selected.
• When the HDMI Audio setting is set to On, or TV
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the
AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output
by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
receiver’s volume.
■ Lip Sync
The Lip Sync function can automatically synchronize
HDMI audio and video that’s gotten out of sync due to
the complex digital video processing being performed by
your HDMI-compatible TV. With HDMI Lip Sync, the
audio delay required to synchronize the audio and video
is calculated and applied automatically by the AV
receiver.
Disable: HDMI lip sync disabled.
Enable: HDMI lip sync enabled.
Notes:
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible
TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.
• You can check the amount of delay being applied by
the HDMI Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen
(see page 104).
■ xvYCC
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both
support the xvYCC color standard, you can enable
xvYCC color on the AV receiver with this setting.
Disable: xvYCC color disabled.
Enable: xvYCC color enabled.
■ Control
This function allows CEC-compatible components or
RIHD-compatible components connected via HDMI to
be controlled with the AV receiver.
Disable: HDMI Control disabled.
Enable: HDMI Control enabled.
Notes:
• Select Disable if a connected component is incompatible or you’re not sure about its compatibility.
• If operation is unreliable when set to Enable, select
Disable instead.
• When the HDMI Audio setting is set to On, or TV
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the
AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output
by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
receiver’s volume.
Power Control
To link the power functions of CEC-compatible components or RIHD-compatible components connected via
HDMI, select Enable.
Disable: Power Control disabled.
Enable: Power Control enabled.
Notes:
• The Power Control setting can be set only when the
above Control setting is set to Enable.
109
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 110 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Advanced Setup—Continued
• HDMI power control only works with HDMI-compatible components that support it and may not work
properly with some components due to their settings
or compatibility.
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver consumes more
power.
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver enters Ready
mode when set to Standby, and the READY indicator
lights up instead of the STANDBY indicator (not
North American model). Also, the AV receiver’s AC
outlets will be on all of the time regardless of whether
the AV receiver is set to On or Standby, or Ready mode
in this case.
TV Control
Select Enable to control the AV receiver from an RIHDcompatible TV connected via HDMI.
Disable: TV Control disabled.
Enable: TV Control enabled.
Notes:
• Select Disable if your TV is incompatible or you’re
note sure about its compatibility.
• The TV Control setting can be set only when the above
Control and Power Control settings are both set to
Enable.
Note:
• After changing the Control, Power Control, or TV
Control setting, be sure to turn all of your components off and then back on again. Refer to the
instruction manuals for your other components.
Network
These settings are for use with home automation equipment and external controllers.
Lock Setup
Lock
With this setting, you can protect your settings by locking the setup menus.
Locked: Setup menus locked.
Unlocked: Setup menus unlocked.
When Locked is selected, only this Lock Setup item can
be accessed.
110
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 111 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Zone 2 and Zone 3
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in two other rooms, or as we call them, Zone 2
and Zone 3. And, you can select a different source for each room.
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers to an
Amp in Zone 2
Connecting Zone 2
There are two ways you can connect Zone 2 speakers:
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.
2. Connect them to an amp in Zone 2.
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers Directly
to the AV receiver
This setup allows 5.1-channel playback in your main
room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2, with a
different source in each room. This is called Powered
Zone 2, as the Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV
receiver. Note that when Powered Zone 2 is turned off,
you can enjoy 7.1-channel playback in your main room.
Hookup
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals.
This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main listening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2,
with a different source in each room.
Hookup
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
on your Zone 2 amp.
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on a
powered subwoofer in Zone 2.
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker terminals on your Zone 2 amp.
Main room
TV
Main room
TV
AV receiver
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
AV receiver
SW
L
ZONE2 R
ZONE2 L
R
PRE OUT
Zone 2
Zone 2
R
LINE INPUT
L
IN
Powered
subwoofer
R
L
Receiver/
integrated amp
You must set the Powered Zone 2 setting to Act
(Activated) to use this setup (see page 113).
Note:
• With this setup, the Zone 2 volume is controlled by the
AV receiver.
Note:
• With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be
set on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no volume control, set the Zone 2 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV receiver
(see page 114).
111
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 112 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Zone 2 Video Outputs
Connecting Zone 3
The AV receiver features a composite video output and
component video output for connection to a TV in
Zone 2, so you can enjoy both audio and video in that
zone.
Hookup
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV
receiver’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video
input on your Zone 2 TV.
• Alternatively, use a component video cable to connect
the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT jacks to a component video
input on your Zone 2 TV.
Main room
TV
Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 3.
Connecting Your Zone 3 Speakers
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and
a different source to those selected for your main room
and Zone 2.
Hookup
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
on your Zone 3 amp.
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 3 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on a
powered subwoofer in Zone 3.
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker terminals on your Zone 3 amp.
Main room
AV receiver
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
TV
ZONE 2
OUT
AV receiver
ZONE 3
SW
Zone 2
L
TV
R
PRE OUT
• If you use the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, you must set the Monitor Out2
setting to Zone 2 (see page 45).
Notes:
• The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from components connected to composite video inputs and
S-Video inputs.
• The COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT outputs video from components
connected to component video inputs.
112
Zone 3
LINE INPUT
IN
Powered
subwoofer
R
L
Receiver/
integrated amp
Note:
• With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be
set on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no volume control, set the Zone 3 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV receiver
(see page 114).
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 113 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Powered Zone 2 Setting
3
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 speakers to the AV
receiver, as explained in “Connecting Your Zone 2
Speakers Directly to the AV receiver” on page 111, you
must set the Powered Zone 2 setting to Act (Activated).
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/
Zone 3,” and then press [Enter].
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.
7-2.Zone2/Zone3
Powered Zone2
Zone2 Out
Zone3 Out
Not Act
Fixed
Fixed
Enter
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
TV
Input
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
4
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Enter
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
u
Men
Men
Receiver
u
+
Enter
Enter
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
-
Setup
Receiver
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
e
tu p
VOL
t
Ex i
Retu
Display
rn
Muting
5
Rec
Playlist
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
Random
Se
1
Receiver
Se
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
tu p
2
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Powered
Zone 2,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Not Act: ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals not activated (Powered
Zone 2 disabled).
Act: ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals activated (Powered Zone
2 enabled).
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
tu p
Notes:
• When Act is selected and Zone 2 turned on, the Zone 2
speakers connected to the ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals output sound, but the surround back speakers connected to the SURR BACK L/R speaker terminals do
not. When Act is selected and Zone 2 turned off, the
surround back speakers output sound as normal.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
Enter
113
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 114 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings
5
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to
an amp with no volume control, set the Zone 2 Out or
Zone 3 Out setting, respectively, to Variable so that you
can set the zone’s volume, balance, and tone on the AV
receiver.
1
Receiver
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Press the [Setup] button.
Setup closes.
Se
tu p
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3
Se
tu p
2
Enter
This section explains how to use Zone 2 and Zone 3.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [Enter].
The Hardware Setup menu appears.
Zone2
Zone3
Tone
Enter
Off
3
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/
Zone 3,” and then press [Enter].
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.
7-2.Zone2/Zone3
Powered Zone2
Zone2 Out
Zone3 Out
Not Act
Fixed
Fixed
Enter
,
Standby
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
TV
On
Input
Selector
Input
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
CD
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
3
Zone3
Zone3
Zone2
Zone2
Remote Mode
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
SAT
4
Enter
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Zone 2 Out” or
“Zone 3 Out,” and use the Left
and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to
select:
Fixed: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume
must be set on the amp in that
zone.
Variable: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume can be set on the AV
receiver.
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
Men
Men
u
u
+
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
VOL
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
rn
Display
Rec
Muting
Playlist
Muting
Random
Listening Mode
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Direct
THX
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close
Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
Re-EQ
VCR
DVD
HDD
RC-691M
114
Receiver
Play Mode
Level–,
Level+
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 115 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Selecting an Input Source for Zones
1
On the remote controller, press
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] Remote
Mode button.
Remote
controller
Zone3
On the AV receiver, press the
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.
Zone2
• On the North American model, you can select a different radio source for each room. For example, XM for
your main room, SIRIUS for Zone 2, and AM/FM for
Zone 3.
Turning Off Zones
1
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 indicator flashes,
and the input selector currently selected
for the zone appears on the display.
AV receiver
2
Remote
controller
On the remote controller, press
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] Remote
Mode button.
Zone3
Zone2
On the AV receiver, press the
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.
AV receiver
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 indicator flashes.
On the remote controller, use the
Input Selector buttons.
Remote
controller
DVD
VCR/DVR
1
2
3
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
CBL/SAT
Phono
+10
AV receiver
On the AV receiver, use the input
selector buttons, or press the
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button
repeatedly
The input source is selected, the zone is
turned on, the name of the input selector appears on the display, and the
Zone 2 or Zone 3 indicator lights continuously.
2
Remote
controller
Standby
AV receiver
On the remote controller, press
the [Standby] button.
On the AV receiver, press the
[Off] button.
The zone is turned off, and the Zone 2
or Zone 3 indicator goes off.
Notes:
• To select AM or FM, press the [Tuner] input selector
button repeatedly. On the North American model, you
can also select XM or SIRIUS.
• Only analog input sources are output by Zone 2 and
Zone 3. Digital input sources are not output. If no
sound is heard when an input source is selected, check
to make sure it’s connected to an analog input.
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, listening modes
that require surround back speakers (6.1/7.1), such as
Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, and THX Ultra2 Cinema,
are unavailable.
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power On/
Standby and Direct Change
functions do not
work.
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations
for your main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3. The same
AM/FM radio station will be heard in each room.
115
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 116 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Adjusting the Volume of Zones
Remote
controller
Zone3
Zone2
Level-
Level+
On the remote controller, press
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] Remote
Mode button, and then use the
[Level–] and [Level+] buttons.
On the AV receiver, press the
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button, and
then use the Level Up and Down
[ ]/[ ] buttons.
Muting Zones
Zone3
Zone2
Muting
On the remote controller, press
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] Remote
Mode button, and then press the
[Muting] button.
To unmute a zone, on the remote
controller, press the [Zone 2] or
[Zone 3] Remote Mode button,
and then press the [Muting] button again.
AV receiver
Adjusting the Tone of Zone 2
1
AV receiver
Adjusting the Balance of Zones
1
AV receiver
116
2
Press the AV receiver’s [Tone]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble.
3
Use the Tone Plus [+] and Minus
[–] buttons to adjust the bass or
treble.
You can boost or cut the Bass or Treble
from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
On the AV receiver, press the
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.
2
Press the AV receiver’s [Tone]
button repeatedly to select Balance.
3
Use the Tone Plus [+] and Minus
[–] buttons to adjust the balance.
You can adjust the balance from 0 in the
center to +10 dB to the right or +10 dB
to the left in 2 dB steps.
On the AV receiver, press the
[Zone 2] button.
Notes:
• Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
• The tone cannot be adjusted for Zone 3.
• The Zone 2 level, balance, and tone functions have no
effect on the ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the Zone 2 Out
setting is set to Fixed (page 114).
• The Zone 3 level and balance functions have no effect
on the ZONE 3 PRE OUT when the Zone 3 Out setting is set to Fixed (page 114).
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 117 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Using the 12V Triggers
3
The 12V triggers A, B, and C can be used to turn on 12V
trigger-capable components automatically when they are
selected as the input source. The triggers can be set so
that they activate when a connected component is
selected as the input source for the main room, Zone 2,
Zone 3, or any combination of rooms.
When triggered, the output from a 12V TRIGGER OUT
goes high (+12 volts, 100 milliamperes max).
Enter
6-x.12V Trigger x Setup
Enter
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
A
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “12V Trigger A,
B, or C,” and then press [Enter].
The 12V Trigger A/B/C Setup screen
appears.
Delay
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
TV/GAME
AUX1
AUX2
TAPE
TUNER
CD
PHONO
1sec
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
Main/Zone2
B
HDMI
AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE
IN 3
RS232
IN 2
IN 1
OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
IN 3
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
IN 2
MONITOR OUT 2
/ZONE 2 OUT
4
ETHERNET
ANTENNA
AM
FM75
OUT 1
Y
V
REMOTE
CONTROL
DIGITAL
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
VCR/DVR
DVD
MONITOR
OUT V
CB/PB
IR
ZONE 2
OUT
A
IN
B
C
12V TRIGGER OUT
ASSIGNABLE
ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1
(DVD)
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
S
S
IN
L
IN 3
ZONE 3
CR/PR
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
IN
FRONT
OUT
CENTER
SURR
A
SURR BACK
B
FRONT
SW
CENTER
SURR
SURR BACK
L
L
(CBL/SAT)
R
R
R
OPTICAL
PHONO
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD
ZONE2 R
TAPE
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP
AUX 1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT
FRONT R
VCR/DVR
SURR R
DVD
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
SURR L
PRE OUT
FRONT L
PRE OUT
SURR BACK L
Bi-AMP
Enter
ZONE2 L
IN 2
(CD)
OUT
Hookup
• Use a miniplug cable to connect the AV receiver’s 12V
TRIGGER OUT A, B, or C jack to the 12 V trigger
input on a connected component.
When several components are turned on simultaneously
by using triggers A, B, and C, depending on the type of
components, a large amount of current may be drawn
momentarily. To prevent this, you can delay trigger signals A, B, and C individually. Another application for
trigger delay is eliminating the “thump” noise that’s
sometimes heard when a source component is turned on.
Delaying the trigger signal for your power amplifier so
that it’s the last component to be turned on will accomplish this.
1
Receiver
Se
Enter
5
Enter
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button, followed by the
[Setup] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
Enter
tu p
2
Enter
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select
“6. Miscellaneous,” and then
press [Enter].
The Miscellaneous menu appears.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Delay,” and use
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select: 0 sec, 1 sec, 2 sec,
or 3 sec.
When 0 sec is selected, the trigger signal is output as soon as the input source
is changed.
6
Se
tu p
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input source,
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select an
option.
Off: No trigger signal is output.
A 12-volt trigger signal is output when
the connected component is selected as
the source for:
Main: Main room.
Zone2: Zone 2.
Main/Z2:Main room or Zone 2.
Zone3: Zone 3.
Main/Z3:Main room or Zone 3.
Z2/Z3: Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Main/Z2/Z3:Main room, Zone 2, or
Zone 3.
When you’ve finished, press the
[Setup] button.
Setup closes.
6.Miscellaneous
Enter
1.Volume Setup
2.OSD Setup
3.12V Trigger A
4.12V Trigger B
5.12V Trigger C
Setup
Setup
Setup
117
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 118 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued
Using the Remote Controller in
Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits
To control the AV receiver with the remote controller
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commercially available multiroom remote control kit for each
zone.
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line
of sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when
it’s installed inside a cabinet.
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV
receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block.
IR Receiver
Connecting
block
IR IN
A or B
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds
them through to the AV receiver in the main room via the
connecting block.
Inside
cabinet
Remote controller
Signal flow
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
Components
IR IN
A or B
IR Receiver
Connecting
block
Remote controller
Main room
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV
receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV receiver’s IR IN A or B jack are fed
through to the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked up by the AV receiver’s remote control sensor are not output.
Zone 2/3
Signal flow
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be
connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN A or B jack, as
shown below. The IR IN A and B jacks are identical. Up
to two IR receivers can be connected.
IR Receiver
Connecting
block
IR IN
A or B
IR OUT
AV receiver
IR Emitter
Remote controller
From the connecting block
Other component
Miniplug cable
Signal flow
IR
A
IN
B
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s
IR OUT jack, as shown below.
OUT
AV receiver
Miniplug cable
Other component
Remote control
sensor
Emitter
IR
A
IN
B
Miniplug
IR Emitter
OUT
AV receiver
Signal flow
118
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 119 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Controlling Other Components
You can control your other components, including those
made by other manufacturers, with the remote controller.
This section explains how to:
• Enter the remote control code for a component that
you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR, etc.
• Learn commands directly from another component’s
remote controller (see page 122).
• Program the Macro buttons to perform a sequence of
up to eight remote control actions (see page 123).
2
While holding down the Remote
Mode button to which you want
to enter the code, press the
[Standby] button.
The Remote indicator lights up.
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
TV
CDR/MD
Cable
Dock
SAT
Standby
Entering Remote Control Codes
To control another component, you must first enter that
component’s remote control code to a Remote Mode button. You’ll need to enter a code for each component that
you want to control.
Remote
indicator
Standby
On
Standby
3
DVD
VCR/DVR
1
2
3
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
4
5
6
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
TV
Input
Number
buttons
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
CD
7
8
9
D.TUN
Phono
0
TV VOL
4
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Remote
Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
TV
Cable
Dock
SAT
Top
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Men
Men
u
Receiver
u
+
CH
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
VOL
Retu
rn
Muting
Playlist
Random
Listening Mode
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Direct
THX
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close
Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
Re-EQ
VCR
DVD
HDD
Notes:
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for the
[Receiver] Remote Mode buttons.
• The remote control codes provided are correct at the
time of printing but subject to change.
Play Mode
RC-691M
1
Press the Remote Mode button
again to select the remote controller mode, point the remote
controller at the component, and
check the operation.
If the remote controller doesn’t work as
expected, and several remote codes are
listed, try each one in turn and use the
one that works best.
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Display
Rec
0
TV I
DVD
+10
CBL/SAT
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit
remote control code.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
Look up the component’s remote
control code in the separate
Remote Control Codes list.
The codes are organized by category.
• The Dock remote mode can only be used with the
Onkyo RI Dock at this time.
• The [DVD] and [CD] Remote Mode buttons are
preprogrammed for use with Integra/Onkyo DVD
players and CD players, respectively.
• To control another manufacturer’s CD recorder or
MD recorder, enter the appropriate remote control
code to the [CD] Remote Mode button.
119
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 120 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Remote Control Codes for Integra/Onkyo
Components Connected via
Integra/Onkyo components that are connected via
are
controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV
receiver, not the component. This allows you to control
components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.
1
2
Make sure the Integra/Onkyo component
is connected with an
cable and an
analog audio cable (RCA).
See page 42 for details.
Resetting the Remote Mode Buttons
You can reset a Remote Mode button to its default remote
control code.
1
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
TV
CDR/MD
Cable
While holding down the Remote
Mode button that you want to
reset, press the TV [
] button.
The Remote indicator flashes three
times.
Dock
SAT
Enter the appropriate remote control code
to the Remote Mode button.
TV
• [DVD] Remote Mode button
5002: Integra/Onkyo DVD player with
2
• [CD] Remote Mode button
6002: Integra/Onkyo CD player with
Remote Mode
• [MD] Remote Mode button
6008: Onkyo MD recorder with
DVD
VCR
CD
TV
CDR/MD
Cable
• [CDR] Remote Mode button
6006: Onkyo CD recorder with
Dock
SAT
• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
6004: Onkyo RI Dock DS-A1 with
See the previous page for how to enter remote
control codes.
3
Press the Remote Mode button
again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the button has been
reset.
The [DVD] and [CD] Remote Mode
buttons are preprogrammed with
remote control codes for controlling
Integra/Onkyo DVD players and CD
players, respectively. When these buttons are reset, the preprogrammed
codes are restored.
Press the Remote Mode button, point the
remote controller at the AV receiver, and
operate the component.
Resetting the Remote Controller
If you want to control an Integra/Onkyo component by
pointing the remote controller directly at it, or you want to
control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s not connected
via
, use the following remote control codes:
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.
1
Receiver
• [DVD] Remote Mode button
5001: Integra/Onkyo DVD player without
(default)
• [CD] Remote Mode button
6001: Integra/Onkyo CD player without
While holding down the
[Receiver] Remote Mode button,
press the [Standby] button.
The Remote indicator flashes five
times.
Standby
(default)
• [MD] Remote Mode button
6007: Onkyo MD recorder without
• [CDR] Remote Mode button
6005: Onkyo CD recorder without
• [DOCK] REMOTE MODE button
6003: Onkyo RI Dock DS-A2 without
2
Receiver
(default)
Note:
• If you connect an
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc or CD
recorder to the TAPE IN/OUT jacks, for remote operation to work properly, you must set the Input Display to
MD or CDR, respectively (see page 49).
120
Press the [Receiver] Remote
Mode button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the remote controller
has been reset.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 121 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Controlling Other Components—Continued
To control another component, point the remote controller at it and use the buttons explained below. (You must select
the appropriate remote controller mode with the Remote Mode buttons first.) With some components, certain buttons
may not work as expected, and some may not work at all.
■ Controlling a TV
■ Controlling a VCR
Press [VCR] first
Press [TV] first
A
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
TV
Input
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
2
5
3
9
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
Standby
VCR/DVR
1
2
VCR
TV CH
6
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
3
CH
Prev
CH
Gu
id
Se
TV
0
t
Ex i
e
Retu
rn
Display
Muting
Playlist
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
3
Zone3
3
VCR
9
0
8
7
9
4
Top
1
2
DVD
VCR
CH
Gu
id
Se
t
Ex i
e
Retu
rn
Display
Muting
Random
Rec
Playlist
Random
9
9
8
4
Top
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
Direct
THX
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close
Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
Re-EQ
VCR
DVD
HDD
7
A [On], [Standby], TV [
]*
Set the TV to On or Standby.
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Play Mode
Direct
THX
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close
Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
Re-EQ
VCR
DVD
HDD
Prev
CH
8
A [On], [Standby]
Set the VCR to On or Standby.
B Number buttons
Enter numbers.
Enter numbers.
Select channels on the TV.
D [Prev CH]
Selects the previous channel.
E [TV Input]*
Selects the TV’s external inputs.
F TV VOL [ ]/[ ]*
Adjust the TV’s volume.
G [Muting]
Mutes the TV.
H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[Menu]/
[Enter]/[Return]
Navigate menus on the TV.
C [Clear]
Cancels functions.
D [CH +/–]
Selects channels on the VCR.
E [Prev CH]
Selects the previous channel.
F Rec [ ]
Starts recording.
G Eject [ ]
Ejects the videocassette.
H [ ], [ ], [ ], [
], [ ]
Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, and
Fast forward.
I [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[Menu]/
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*)
are exclusively for controlling a TV
and can be used at any time, regardless of the currently selected remote
controller mode.
Gu
id
Se
VOL
t
Ex i
e
tu p
Retu
rn
Display
Rec
Muting
Playlist
Random
Stereo
Surround
Repeat
Audio
Subtitle
Direct
THX
All ST
Test Tone
CH Sel
Level-
Level+
Open/Close
Video Off
Audio Sel
L Night
Re-EQ
VCR
DVD
8
6
7
HDD
[Enter]/[Return]
Navigate menus on the VCR.
Play Mode
RC-691M
RC-691M
B Number buttons
C [CH +/–], TV CH [+]/[–]*
8
u
Listening Mode
Stereo
RC-691M
Men
u
Enter
Disc
Album
-
5
8
Men
CH
Listening Mode
Stereo
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
+
6
Listening Mode
Dock
Dimmer
VOL
tu p
Cable
SAT
9
u
Enter
Disc
Album
Prev
CH
TV
Receiver
+
-
5
Men
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Dock
u
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Men
12
Macro
Zone2
CD
Cable
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
2
CD
D.TUN
Phono
TV VOL
8
Rec
6
Clear
Dimmer
VOL
tu p
AUX 2
5
+10
SAT
8
u
Enter
Disc
Album
AUX 1
4
9
Macro
Receiver
+
-
4
Men
u
Game/TV
CD
D.TUN
1
DVD
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Men
2
TV CH
CDR/MD
Dock
Dimmer
Top
+
AUX 2
5
TV
Input
+
AUX 1
Zone2
SAT
8
3
3
A
Remote Mode
CD
Cable
CBL/SAT
2
4
CDR/MD
TV
VCR/DVR
1
Game/TV
Remote Mode
DVD
Standby
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
3
Zone3
3
On
DVD
2
+10
Press [Cable] (SAT) first
CBL/SAT
TV
Phono
12
2
On
DVD
Input
6
Macro
1
A
CD
D.TUN
Phono
+10
■ Controlling a Satellite or
Cable Receiver
A [On], [Standby]
Set the satellite/cable receiver to
On or Standby.
B Number buttons
Enter numbers.
C [Clear]
Cancels functions.
D [CH +/–]
Selects satellite/cable channels.
E [Prev CH]
Selects the previous channel.
F [Guide]
Displays the program guide.
G [
], [ ]
Rewind and Fast forward.
H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[Menu]/
[Enter]/[Return]
Navigate menus on the satellite/cable receiver.
121
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 122 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Learning Commands
If the command is learned successfully,
the Remote indicator flashes twice.
EV
ST E
TEON
T
L
SE
H
C
C
IS
D
VID
VD
D
D
PE
TA
R
G
-2
D
EO
C
VID
-1
EO
P
IN
PE
TA
P
EE
SL
ER
W
PO
C
VD
D
P
U
O
O
N
R O
T
TO H
SE
C P
ER E
LE R
N PR
SE E
TU
T N
U TU
T
V
t
Inpu
-
H
T
V
VO
L
Men
u
e
VOL
t
Ex i
Retu
rn
Muting
While holding down the Remote
Mode button for the mode in
which you want to use the command, press the [On] button.
The Remote indicator lights up.
Dock
SAT
Receiver
Tape/AMP
On
122
C
Cable
V
TV
9
CD
CDR/MD
T
VCR
+
DVD
CD
Remote Mode
6
1
tu p
X2
Display
Gu
id
Se
T
Prev
CH
SA
u
Enter
-
L/
CH
I
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Sleep
+
Disc
Album
by
Dock
SAT
Men
r
Cable
Dimmer
Top
AU
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
TV
3
ne
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
1, 4
Tu
2
5
12
Macro
VCR
CB
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
DVD
X1
AU
9
0
1
RC-691M
To learn more commands, repeat
steps 2 and 3.
Press any Remote Mode button when
you’ve finished.
CD
D.TUN
Phono
+10
2
8
VR
Tuner
7
ver
cei
P
Re AM
e/ leep
Tap S
Tape
R/D
e2
Zon
-
TV
D
e3
Zon
k
Doc
/M
TV CH
6
DC
e/
R
AUX 2
5
nd
Gan
D
C
T
C
SA
ble
+
AUX 1
4
1
3
e
od
M
D
Ca
3
Game/TV
CBL/SAT
RE
SUOD
M
CH
TI- T
UL PU
M IN
D
R
2
Sta
V
VC
ote
em
R
VCR/DVR
1
ER
D
2
DVD
4
UN
D.T
ar 2
Cle 1
D
DV
Input
8
0 11 tor
c
ele
t S ro
10 pu ac
In M
1
TV
M
n
pe
0
+1
no
Pho
7
--
Standby
IM
O
4
Ta
/-
On
1
D
About 2 to 6
inches (5–15 cm)
--
Remote
indicator
EL
M
U
TIN
G
VO
LU
M
E
R
The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the commands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for
example, the Play command from your CD player’s
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and
then transmit the exact same command when its Play
[ ] button is pressed in the CD remote mode.
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate
remote control code (page 119) but some buttons don’t
work as expected.
2
Press the button you want to
learn the new command.
3
Point the remote controllers at
each other, about 2 to 6 inches
(5–15 cm) apart, and then press
and hold the button whose command you want to learn until the
Remote indicator flashes.
Notes:
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
Remote Mode, Macro [1], [2], [3], TV CH [+]/[–], ReEQ, Light.
• When you want to learn the command from your TV’s
Power button, select the TV remote control mode and
use the remote controller’s [Standby] button to learn
the command. In the TV remote control mode, the
remote controller’s [Standby] and TV [
] buttons
are linked, so using the [Standby] button to learn the
command will mean that you can also use the TV
[
] button to turn your TV on or off in TV remote
control mode.
• When you want to learn the commands from your
TV’s Channel Up and Down buttons, select the TV
remote control mode and use the remote controller’s
CH [+/–] button (left to the [Enter] button) to learn the
commands. In the TV remote control mode, the
remote controller’s CH [+/–] and TV CH [+]/[–] buttons are linked, so using the CH [+/–] button to learn
these commands will mean that you can also use the
TV CH [+]/[–] buttons to change channels in TV
remote control mode.
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to
90 commands, although this will be less if commands
that use a lot of memory are learned.
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,
and so on are preprogrammed with commands for
controlling Onkyo CD players, cassette decks, and
DVD players. However, they can learn new commands, and you can restore the preprogrammed commands at any time by resetting the remote controller
(see page 120).
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat
this procedure.
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can
be learned.
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all
learned commands will be lost and will have to be
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other
remote controllers.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 123 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Using Macros
You can program the remote controller’s Macro buttons
to perform a sequence of remote control actions.
Example:
To play a CD you typically need to perform the following actions:
1. Press the [Receiver] Remote Mode button to select
the Receiver remote controller mode.
2. Press the [On] button to turn on the AV receiver.
3. Press the [CD] Input Selector button to select the
CD input source.
4. Press the [CD] Remote Mode button to select the
CD remote controller mode.
5. Press the Play [ ] button to start playback on the
CD player.
You can program a Macro button so that all five actions
are performed with just one button press.
Making Macros
2
Press the buttons whose actions
you want to program into the
macro in the order you want them
performed.
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press the following buttons:
[ON], [CD] Input Selector, [CD]
Remote Mode, Play [ ].
3
When you’ve finished, press the
Macro button again.
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
If you enter eight commands, the process will finish automatically.
Macro
1
2
3
Note:
• If any of the buttons you used to make a macro are
taught new commands, the macro will no longer work
properly and will have to be made again.
Running Macros
Each Macro button can store one macro, and each macro
can contain up to eight commands.
Macro
1
2
3
Remote
indicator
On
Standby
DVD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
1
2
3
+
Game/TV
AUX 1
AUX 2
TV CH
4
5
6
-
Tape
Tuner
7
8
TV
Input
CD
9
D.TUN
Phono
+10
Macro
1, 2, 3
0
TV VOL
Clear
11
--/--- 10
Input Selector
12
Macro
1
2
DVD
VCR
TV
Cable
Zone3
3
Remote Mode
Zone2
CD
CDR/MD
Remote
Mode
Dock
SAT
Tape/AMP
Sleep
Dimmer
Top
Receiver
u
Men
Men
Receiver
Deleting Macros
u
+
CH
Disc
Album
Enter
VOL
1
1
While holding down the Remote
Mode button of the remote controller mode you want to use at
the start of the macro, press
Macro button [1], [2], or [3].
The Remote indicator lights up.
Remote Mode
DVD
VCR
CD
TV
CDR/MD
Cable
Press the Macro [1], [2], or [3]
button.
The commands in the macro are transmitted in the order in which they were
programmed. Keep the remote controller pointed at the AV receiver until all
of the commands have been transmitted.
Macros can be run at any time, regardless of the current remote controller
mode.
Dock
SAT
While holding down the
[Receiver] Remote Mode button,
press the Macro button whose
macro you want to delete.
Receiver
Macro
1
2
3
Receiver
Tape/AMP
Macro
1
2
3
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press and hold the [Receiver]
Remote Mode button, and then press
Macro button [1], [2], or [3].
2
Press the Macro button again.
Macro
1
2
3
123
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 124 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Troubleshooting
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact the dealer from whom you purchased
this unit.
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting
the AV receiver before contacting the dealer from
whom you purchased this unit.
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults,
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]
button, press the [Standby/On] button. “Clear” will
appear on the display and the AV receiver will
enter Standby mode.
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your
radio presets and custom settings.
Power
Can’t turn on the AV receiver
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged into the wall
outlet properly.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait 5
seconds or more, then plug it back in again.
The AV receiver turns off as soon as it’s turned on
• The amp protection circuit has been activated.
Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immediately. Disconnect all speaker cables and input sources,
and leave the AV receiver with its power cord disconnected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power cord
and set the volume to maximum. If the AV receiver
stays on, set the volume to minimum, disconnect the
power cord, and reconnect your speakers and input
sources. If the AV receiver turns off when you set the
volume to maximum, disconnect the power cord, and
contact the dealer from whom you purchased this
unit..
Audio
There’s no sound or it’s very quiet
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned to the input
selector (page 50).
• Make sure that the correct audio input is selected
(page 81).
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 26).
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is
correct, and that the bare wire is in contact with the
metal part of each speaker terminal (page 22).
• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
• Check the volume (page 60). The AV receiver is
designed for home theater enjoyment and has a wide
volume range for precise adjustment.
124
• If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the display,
press the remote controller’s [Muting] button to
unmute the AV receiver (page 79).
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the Phones
jack, no sound is output by the main room speakers
(page 80).
• Check the digital audio output settings on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button
on your DVD player’s remote controller.
• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must use
an MC head amp or MC transformer (page 39).
• Check the speaker settings (pages 96–101).
• If the digital signal format is set to PCM or DTS, set it
to Auto (page 81).
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,
and be sure to select a compatible audio format.
Only the front speakers produce sound
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, only the
front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
(page 93).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 96).
Only the center speaker produces sound
• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie or Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music listening mode with a mono source,
such as an AM radio station or mono TV program, the
sound will be concentrated in the center speaker.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to C
(page 93).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 96).
The surround speakers produce no sound
• When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected,
the surround speakers produce no sound.
• Depending on the source and the current listening
mode, not much sound may be produced by the surround speakers. Try another listening mode (page 82).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 96).
The center speaker produces no sound
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, the center
speaker produces no sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
(page 93).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 96).
The surround back speakers produce no sound
• The surround back speakers are not used with all listening modes. Try another listening mode (page 82).
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround
back speakers with some sources.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 96).
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the surround back speakers produce no sound (page 111).
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 125 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Troubleshooting—Continued
The subwoofer produces no sound
• If the source material contains no audio in the LFE
channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 96).
The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound
• The Zone 2/3 speakers only output sources that are
connected to an analog input. Check to see if the
source component is connected to an analog input.
There’s no sound with a certain signal format
• Check the digital audio output setting on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button
on your DVD player’s remote controller.
Can’t get 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the surround back speakers produce no sound (page 111).
The volume cannot be set to +18 dB (99)
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set
(page 106).
• After the Automatic Speaker Setup function has been
run, or the volume level of each individual speaker has
been adjusted (pages 79 and 100), the maximum volume may be reduced.
Noise can be heard
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power
cords, speaker cables, and so on can degrade audio
performance, so don’t use them.
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
The Late Night function doesn’t work
• Make sure that the source is Dolby Digital (page 91).
The analog multichannel input doesn’t work
• Check the multichannel input connections (page 31).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to
the input selector (page 52).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected
(page 81).
• Check the audio output settings on your DVD player.
About DTS signals
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a malfunction.
• When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listening mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to
prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or
fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your
player from DTS to PCM, as the AV receiver does not
switch formats immediately, you may not hear anything, in which case you should stop your player for
about 3 seconds, and then resume playback.
• With some CD players, you won’t be able to playback
DTS material properly even though your player is con-
nected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency response
changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recognize it as a
genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you may hear noise.
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio signals, sound may not be output immediately.
Video
There’s no picture
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 26).
• Make sure that each video component is properly connected.
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
• If your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT, set the
HDMI Monitor setting to Yes (page 45), and select “- -” in the “HDMI Input Setup” on page 46 to watch composite video, S-Video, and component video sources.
• If your TV is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, set the HDMI Monitor
setting to No (page 45), and select “- - -” in the “Component Video Input Setup” on page 48 to watch composite video and S-Video sources.
• If the video source is connected to a component video
input, your TV must be connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT or HDMI
OUT (page 27).
• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,
your TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT
(page 27).
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV does not
support the current video resolution and you need to
select another resolution on your DVD player.
The onscreen menus don’t appear
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
The picture is distorted
• On non-North American models, specify the TV system used in your area in the “TV Format Setup” on
page 58.
Tuner
Reception is noisy, stereo FM reception suffers
from hiss, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t
light up
• Relocate your antenna.
• Move the AV receiver away from your TV or computer.
125
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 126 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Troubleshooting—Continued
• Listen to the station in mono (page 61).
• When listening to an AM station, operating the remote
controller may cause noise.
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.
Remote Controller
The remote controller doesn’t work
• Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct polarity (page 14).
• Make sure that the remote controller is not too far
away from the AV receiver and there’s no obstruction
between the remote controller and the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor (page 14).
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller mode (page 15).
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control
code (page 119).
Can’t control other components
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller mode (page 15).
• If you’ve connected an
-capable Onkyo MD
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE
IN/OUT jacks, or an RI Dock to the GAME/TV IN
jacks, for the remote controller to work properly, you
must set the Input Display to MD, CDR, or DOCK,
respectively (see page 49).
• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
more than one code is listed, try each one.
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function
to learn the commands of the other component’s
remote controller (page 122).
• With some AV components, certain buttons may not
work as expected, and some may not work at all.
• To control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s connected via
, point the remote controller at the AV
receiver. Be sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first (page 120).
• To control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s not
connected via
, or another manufacturer’s component, point the remote controller at that component. Be
sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first
(page 119).
Can’t learn commands from another remote
controller
• When learning commands, make sure that the transmitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at
each other.
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot
be learned, especially those that contain several
instructions.
126
Recording
Can’t record
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is
selected.
• To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV
receiver, input signals are not fed through to outputs
with the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or
VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).
Others
The sound changes when I connect my headphones
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, or Direct, in which case it stays the same.
How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
• On the Audio Adjust menu, change the Multiplex setting to Main or Sub (page 94).
The
functions don’t work
• To use
, you must make an
connection and an
analog audio connection (RCA) between the component and AV receiver, even if they are connected digitally (page 42).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the
functions
don’t work.
Components connected to the AV receiver’s AC
outlets don’t turn on or off when the AV receiver
is set to On or Standby
• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable
(page 109), the AC outlets are on all the time regardless of whether the AV receiver is set to On or Standby,
or Ready mode in this case, so any components connected to them cannot be turned on or off automatically.
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal processing and control functions. In very rare situations,
severe interference, noise from an external source, or
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet, wait at least 5 seconds, and then plug it back
in again.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by
this unit’s malfunction. Before you record important
data, make sure that the material will be recorded correctly.
Set the AV receiver to Standby before disconnecting
the power cord from the wall outlet.
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 127 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Specifications
Amplifier Section
General
Rated Output Power
North American:
130 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a
maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.08% (FTC)
150 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)
160 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 6 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)
Australian:
7 ch × 180 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
Maximum Output Power
Asian:
7 ch × 230 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (JEITA)
Dynamic Power
300 W (3Ω, Front)
250 W (4Ω, Front)
150 W (8Ω, Front)
THD (Total Harmonic
Distortion)
0.05% (Power Rated)
Damping Factor
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8Ω)
Input Sensitivity and
Impedance
200 mV/ 47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
Output Level and
Impedance
200 mV/ 470 Ω (REC OUT)
Phono Overload
70 mV (MM 1 kHz, 0.5%)
Frequency Response
5 Hz–100 kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)
Tone Control
±10 dB, 20 Hz (BASS)
±10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
Signal to Noise Ratio
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)
Speaker Impedance
4Ω–16Ω
Power Supply
Power Consumption
North American:
Australian:
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Weight
North American:
Australian:
HDMI
Component
Composite
S-Video
■ FM
Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
87.5 MHz– 107.9 MHz
Australian:
87.5 MHz– 108.0 MHz
435 × 194 × 454.5 mm
17-1/8" × 7-5/8"× 17-7/8"
23.1 kg
50.9 lbs.
22.8 kg
50.3 lbs.
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3
IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2
■ Video Output
HDMI
Component
Composite
S-Video
OUT
MONITOR OUT 1, MONITOR OUT 2
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT
■ Audio Inputs
Digital Inputs
Analog Inputs
Multichannel Inputs
Tuner Section
9.5 A
870 W
■ Video Input
Video Section
Input Sensitivity/Output
Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p /75Ω (Component and S-Video Y)
0.7 Vp-p /75Ω (Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)
0.28 Vp-p /75Ω (S-Video C)
1 Vp-p /75Ω (Composite)
Component Video
Frequency Response
5 Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
COAXIAL (IN 1, IN 2, IN 3),
OPTICAL (IN 1, IN 2), DIGITAL
PHONO, CD, TAPE, AUX 1, GAME/TV,
CBL/SAT, VCR/DVR, DVD, MULTI CH
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,
SURR, SURR BACK), AUX 2
7.1 ch
■ Audio Outputs
Digital Output
Analog Outputs
OPTICAL (OUT)
TAPE, VCR/DVR, PRE OUT (FRONT,
CENTER, SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR
BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)
Multichannel Pre
Outputs
7
Subwoofer Pre Outputs 1
Speaker Outputs
ZONE2 R, SURR BACK R, FRONT R,
SURR R, CENTER, SURR L, FRONT L,
SURR BACK L, ZONE2 L
Phones
PHONES
■ Control Terminal
MIC
Yes
RS232
Ethernet
IR Input/Output
12 V Trigger Out
USB
1
1
2/1
3
No
■ AM
Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
530 kHz–1710 kHz
Australian:
522 kHz–1611 kHz
■ Digital Tuner
North American:
Preset Channel
XM, SIRIUS
40
Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.
127
DTR-7.8̲En.book Page 128 Friday, May 9, 2008 1:56 PM
Integra Division of
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION
18 park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.integrahometheater.com
Integra Division of
ONKYO CORPORATION
Sales & Product Planning Div.: 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8124
En
I0805-2
SN 29344459A
(C) Copyright 2007 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.
* 2 9 3 4 4 4 5 9 A *